Download 2015 Hyundai H-1 Owner’s Manual PDF

Download 2015 Hyundai H-1 Owner’s Manual PDF
OWNER'S MANUAL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.
However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so that
our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descriptions
and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result,
you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific
vehicle.
Please note that some models are equipped with Right-Hand Drive (RHD).
The explanations and illustrations for some operations in RHD models are
opposite of those written in this manual.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited
warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the Department of Transportation and other government agencies in your country.
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible
for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic
systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose
to install one of these devices.
F2
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
WARNING
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other
persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.
CAUTION
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the
caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
✽ NOTICE
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
F3
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who drive
Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very
proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that service and maintenance on your vehicle be performed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
CAUTION
Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet
Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page
9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
Copyright 2014 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval
system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.
F4
table of contents
Introduction
1
Your vehicle at a glance
2
Safety features of your vehicle
3
Features of your vehicle
4
Driving your vehicle
5
What to do in an emergency
6
Maintenance
7
Consumer information
8
Specifications
9
Index
I
Introduction
How to use this manual / 1-2
Fuel requirements / 1-2
Vehicle handling instructions / 1-6
Vehicle break-in process / 1-6
1
Introduction
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
A010000AUN
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist you
in many ways. We strongly recommend
that you read the entire manual. In order
to minimize the chance of death or injury,
you must read the WARNING and CAUTION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words in this
manual to best explain how to enjoy your
vehicle. By reading your manual, you
learn about features, important safety
information, and driving tips under various road conditions.
The general layout of the manual is provided in the Table of Contents. A good
place to start is the index; it has an alphabetical listing of all information in your
manual.
Sections: This manual has nine sections
plus an index. Each section begins with a
brief list of contents so you can tell at a
glance if that section has the information
you want.
1 2
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
You will find various WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs, and NOTICEs in this manual. These WARNINGs were prepared to
enhance your personal safety.You should
carefully read and follow ALL procedures
and recommendations provided in these
WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and NOTICEs.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which harm, serious bodily injury or
death could result if the warning is
ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which damage to your vehicle could
result if the caution is ignored.
✽ NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or helpful information is being provided.
Gasoline engine
A020101AEN
Unleaded
Your new HYUNDAI vehicle is designed
to use only unleaded fuel having an
Octane Rating of RON (Research
Octane Number) 91/AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) 87 or higher. (Do not use
methanol blended fuels.)
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain
maximum performance with UNLEADED
FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emissions and spark plug fouling.
CAUTION
NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The
use of leaded fuel is detrimental to
the catalytic converter and will
damage the engine control system’s oxygen sensor and affect
emission control.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. (We recommend that the system be consulted by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Introduction
A020103AUN
WARNING
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.
A020102AEN
Leaded (if equipped)
For some countries, your vehicle is
designed to use leaded gasoline. When
you are going to use leaded gasoline, we
recommend that you ask an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Octane Rating of leaded gasoline is
same with unleaded one.
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol),
and gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol (also known as wood alcohol)
are being marketed along with or instead
of leaded or unleaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or
gasohol containing any methanol. Either
of these fuels may cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system,
engine control system and emission control system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if
drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability problems
may not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty if they result from the use
of:
1. Gasohol containing more than 10%
ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
CAUTION
Never use gasohol which contains
methanol. Discontinue use of any
gasohol product which impairs drivability.
Other fuels
Using fuels such as;
- Silicone (Si) contained fuel,
- MMT (Manganese, Mn) contained fuel,
- Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and
- Other metalic additives contained fuels,
may cause vehicle and engine damage
or cause plugging, misfiring, poor acceleration, engine stalling, catalyst melting,
abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduction,
etc.
Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate.
✽ NOTICE
Damage to the fuel system or performance problem caused by the use of these
fuels may not be covered by your New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
1 3
Introduction
A020104AEN
Use of MTBE
HYUNDAI recommends avoiding fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content
2.7% weight) in your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may
reduce vehicle performance and produce
vapor lock or hard starting.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
may not cover damage to the fuel
system and any performance problems that are caused by the use of
fuels containing methanol or fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
A020105AUN
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be used in your vehicle.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and damage components of
the fuel system, engine control system
and emission control system.
1 4
Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
unleaded gasoline which has an octane
rating of RON(Research
Octane Number) 95 / AKI (Anti Knock
Index) 91 or higher (for Europe) or
Octane Rating of RON (Research
Octane Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) 87 or higher (except Europe).
For customers who do not use good
quality gasoline including fuel additives
regularly, and have problems starting or
the engine does not run smoothly, one
bottle of additives added to the fuel tank
at every 15,000km (for Europe)/5,000km
(except Europe). Additives are available
from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use
them.
A020107AUN
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle in
another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is available.
Diesel engine
A020201DUN
Diesel fuel
Diesel engine must be operated only on
commercially available diesel fuel that
complies with EN 590 or comparable
standard. (EN stands for "European
Norm").
Do not use marine diesel fuel, heating
oils, or non-approved fuel additives, as
this will increase wear and cause damage to the engine and fuel system.
The use of non-approved fuels and/or
fuel additives will result in a limitation of
your warranty rights.
Diesel fuel of above cetane 51 is used in
your vehicle. If two types of diesel fuel
are available, use summer or winter fuel
properly according to the following temperature conditions.
• Above -5°C (23°F) ... Summer type
diesel fuel.
• Below -5°C (23°F) ... Winter type diesel
fuel.
Watch the fuel level in the tank very carefully : If the engine stops through fuel failure, the circuits must be completely
purged to permit restarting.
Introduction
CAUTION
Do not let any gasoline or water
enter the tank. This would make it
necessary to drain it out and to
bleed the lines to avoid jamming the
injection pump and damaging the
engine.
CAUTION - Diesel Fuel
(if equipped with DPF)
It is recommended to use the regulated automotive diesel fuel for
diesel vehicle equipped with the
DPF system.
If you use diesel fuel including high
sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur)
and unspecified additives, it can
cause the DPF system to be damaged and white smoke can be emitted.
A020202BUN
A020202AUN
Biodiesel
Commercially supplied Diesel blends of no
more than 7% biodiesel, commonly known
as "B7 Diesel" may be used in your vehicle
if Biodiesel meets EN 14214 or equivalent
specifications. (EN stands for "European
Norm"). The use of biofuels exceeding 7%
made from rapeseed methyl ester (RME),
fatty acid methyl ester (FAME), vegetable
oil methyl ester (VME) etc. or mixing diesel
exceeding 7% with biodiesel will cause
increased wear or damage to the engine
and fuel system. Repair or replacement of
worn or damaged components due to the
use of non approved fuels will not be covered by the manufactures warranty.
Biodiesel (for New Zealand)
Commercially supplied Diesel blends of
no more than 7% biodiesel, commonly
known as "B7 Diesel" may be used in
your vehicle if Biodiesel meets EN 14214
or equivalent specifications. (EN stands
for "European Norm"). The use of biofuels exceeding 7%, made from rapeseed
methyl ester (RME), vegetable oil methyl
ester (VME) etc. or mixing diesel exceeding 7% with biodiesel will cause
increased wear or damage to the engine
and fuel system. Repair or replacement
of worn or damaged components due to
the use of non approved fuels will not be
covered by the manufactures warranty.
CAUTION
• Never use any fuel, whether
diesel, B7 biodiesel or otherwise,
that fails to meet the latest petroleum industry specification.
• Never use any fuel additives or
treatments that are not recommended or approved by the vehicle manufacturer.
1 5
Introduction
VEHICLE HANDLING
INSTRUCTIONS
A090000AEN
As with other vehicles of this type, failure
to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control, an accident or
vehicle rollover.
Specific design characteristics (higher
ground clearance, track, etc.) give this
vehicle a higher center of gravity than
other types of vehicles. In other words
they are not designed for cornering at the
same speeds as conventional 2-wheel
drive vehicles. Avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers. Again, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control, an accident or vehicle
rollover. Be sure to read the “Reducing
the risk of a rollover” driving guidelines, in section 5 of this manual.
1 6
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
A030000AUN
No special break-in period is needed. By
following a few simple precautions for the
first 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add to
the performance, economy and life of
your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine speed
(rpm, or revolutions per minute)
between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for long
periods of time, either fast or slow.
Varying engine speed is needed to
properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat properly.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first 2,000
km (1,200 miles) of operation.
Your vehicle at a glance
Interior overview / 2-2
Instrument panel overview / 2-4
Engine compartment / 2-6
2
Your vehicle at a glance
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
Left-Hand drive type
1. Door lock/unlock button* ...................4-10
2. Outside rearview mirror control
switch*...............................................4-30
3. Central door lock switch* ..................4-11
4. Power window switches*...................4-16
5. Air vent..............................................4-63
6. Front fog light switch*........................4-53
7. Rear fog light switch* .......................4-53
8. Head lamp leveling device*...............4-54
9. Instrument panel illumination control
knob*.................................................4-33
10. Steering wheel tilt control* ..............4-27
11. Steering wheel ................................4-26
12. Fuse box .........................................7-55
13. Hood release lever..........................4-21
14. Brake pedal.....................................5-19
15. Accelerator pedal..............................5-6
16. Seat...................................................3-2
17. Fuel filler lid release button.............4-23
* : if equipped
OTQ027001G
B010000ATQ
2 2
Your vehicle at a glance
Right-Hand drive type
1. Door lock/unlock button* ...................4-10
2. Outside rearview mirror control
switch*...............................................4-30
3. Central door lock switch* ..................4-11
4. Power window switches*...................4-16
5. Air vent..............................................4-63
6. Front fog light switch*........................4-53
7. Rear fog light switch* .......................4-53
8. Head lamp leveling device*...............4-54
9. Instrument panel illumination control
knob*.................................................4-33
10. Steering wheel tilt control* ..............4-27
11. Steering wheel ................................4-26
12. Fuse box .........................................7-55
13. Hood release lever..........................4-21
14. Brake pedal.....................................5-19
15. Accelerator pedal..............................5-6
16. Seat...................................................3-2
17. Fuel filler lid release button.............4-23
* : if equipped
OTQ027001R
B010000ATQ-EA
2 3
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
Left-Hand drive type
1. Instrument cluster.............................4-32
2. Light control / Turn signals ...............4-50
3. Horn .................................................4-27
4. Wiper/Washer...................................4-55
5. Steering wheel audio controls* ........4-83
6. Driver’s front air bag* .......................3-44
7. Ignition switch.....................................5-4
8. Digital clock* ....................................4-80
9. Audio*...............................................4-82
10. Hazard warning flasher
switch ......................................4-50, 6-2
11. Climate control system* .................4-61
12. Parking brake .................................5-20
13. Shift lever ................................5-12, 5-9
14. AUX, USB and iPod port* ..............4-84
15. Passenger’s front air bag* ..............3-44
16. Glove box .......................................4-74
* : if equipped
OTQ027002G
B020000BTQ
2 4
Your vehicle at a glance
Right-Hand drive type
1. Instrument cluster.............................4-32
2. Light control / Turn signals ...............4-50
3. Horn .................................................4-27
4. Wiper/Washer...................................4-55
5. Steering wheel audio controls* ........4-83
6. Driver’s front air bag* .......................3-44
7. Ignition switch.....................................5-4
8. Digital clock* ....................................4-80
9. Audio*...............................................4-82
10. Hazard warning flasher
switch ......................................4-50, 6-2
11. Climate control system* .................4-61
12. Parking brake .................................5-20
13. Shift lever ................................5-12, 5-9
14. AUX, USB and iPod port* ..............4-84
15. Passenger’s front air bag* ..............3-44
16. Glove box .......................................4-74
* : if equipped
OTQ027002R
B020000BTQ
2 5
Your vehicle at a glance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Power steering fluid reservoir ...........7-30
2. Automatic transmission fluid
dipstick*.............................................7-31
3. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-25
4. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-29
5. Fuse box ...........................................7-56
6. Negative battery terminal..................7-41
7. Positive battery terminal ...................7-41
8. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-27
9. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-25
10. Radiator cap ...................................7-28
11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir ...7-33
12. Air cleaner.......................................7-35
* : if equipped
* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OTQ077001
B030000ATQ
2 6
Seats / 3-2
Seat belts / 3-15
Child restraint system / 3-26
Air bag - supplemental restraint system / 3-38
Safety features of your vehicle
3
Safety features of your vehicle
SEATS
Front seat
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height (Driver’s seat)*
(4) Seat warmer (Driver’s seat)*
(5) Headrest
2nd row seat* / 3rd row seat*
(6) Forward and backward/
Seat rotation (2nd row seat only)*
(7) Seatback angle
(8) Headrest
4th row seat*
(9) Forward and backward
(10) Seat cushion folding
(11) Headrest
*: if equipped
OTQ037001E
C010000BTQ
The actual seats in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
3 2
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Loose objects
Loose objects in the driver’s foot
area could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident. Do not place
anything under the front seats.
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, hold the seatback
and return it slowly and be sure
there are no other occupants
around the seat. If the seatback is
returned without being held and
controlled, the back of the seat
could spring forward resulting in
accidental injury to a person struck
by the seatback.
WARNING - Driver responsibility for passengers
Riding in a vehicle with the seatback reclined could lead to serious
or fatal injury in an accident. If a
seat is reclined during an accident,
the occupant’s hips may slide
under the lap portion of the seat
belt applying great force to the
unprotected abdomen. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result.
The driver must advise the front
passenger to keep the seatback in
an upright position whenever the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Do not use a sitting cushion that
reduces friction between the seat
and passenger. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt during an accident or a sudden stop. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result
because the seat belt can't operate
normally.
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the seat
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property damage.
• Do not allow anything to interfere
with the normal position of the
seatback. Storing items against a
seatback or in any other way
interfering with proper locking of
a seatback could result in serious
or fatal injury in a sudden stop or
collision.
• Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap portion of the seat belt snug and low
across the hips. This is the best
position to protect you in case of
an accident.
• In order to avoid unnecessary
and perhaps severe air bag
injuries, always sit as far back as
possible from the steering wheel
while maintaining comfortable
control of the vehicle. We recommend that your chest be at least
250 mm (10 inches) away from
the steering wheel.
3 3
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Rear seatbacks
• The rear seatback must be
securely latched. If not, passengers and objects could be thrown
forward resulting in serious
injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop or collision.
• Luggage and other cargo should
be laid flat in the cargo area. If
objects are large, heavy, or must
be piled, they must be secured.
Under no circumstances should
cargo be piled higher than the
seatbacks. Failure to follow these
warnings could result in serious
injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop, collision or rollover.
• No passenger should ride in the
cargo area or sit or lie on folded
seatbacks while the vehicle is
moving. All passengers must be
properly seated in seats and
restrained properly while riding.
• When resetting the seatback to
the upright position, make sure it
is securely latched by pushing it
forward and backwards.
(Continued)
3 4
(Continued)
• To avoid the possibility of burns,
do not remove the carpet in the
cargo area. Emission control
devices beneath this floor generate high temperatures.
WARNING
After adjusting the seat, always
check that it is securely locked into
place by attempting to move the
seat forward or backward without
using the lock release lever.
Sudden or unexpected movement
of the driver's seat could cause you
to lose control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.
WARNING
• Do not adjust the seat while wearing seat belts. Moving the seat
cushion forward may cause
strong pressure on the abdomen.
• Use extreme caution so that
hands or other objects are not
caught in the seat mechanisms
while the seat is moving.
• Do not put a cigarette lighter on
the floor or seat. When you operate the seat, gas may gush out of
the lighter and cause fire.
• If there are occupants in the rear
seats, be careful while adjusting
the front seat position.
• Use extreme caution when picking small objects trapped under
the seats or between the seat and
the center console. Your hands
might be cut or injured by the
sharp edges of the seat mechanism.
Safety features of your vehicle
OTQ037002
Front seat adjustment
C010101AUN
Forward and backward
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever
under the front edge of the seat cushion up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and make
sure the seat is locked securely by trying
to move forward and backward without
using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
OTQ037003
OTQ037004
C010102AUN
C010103AUN
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on the
seatback recline lever located on the
outside of the seat at the rear.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat and
adjust the seatback of the seat to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seatback is locked in place. (The lever
MUST return to its original position for
the seatback to lock.)
Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)
To change the height of the seat cushion,
push the lever that is located on the outside of the seat cushion upwards or
downwards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push the
lever down several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever
up several times.
3 5
Safety features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in ON
position, the heating system in the seat
turns off or on automatically depending
on the seat temperature.
CAUTION
OTQ037008E
C010107CTQ
Seat warmer
(Driver’s seat, if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the
driver’s seat during cold weather. With
the ignition switch in the ON position,
push the switch to warm the driver's seat.
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer
is not needed, keep the switch in the
"OFF" position.
• The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
3 6
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage
the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place anything on
the seats that insulates against
heat, such as blankets, cushions
or seat covers while the seat
warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmer. Damage to the seat
warming components could occur.
• Do not change the seat cover. It
may damage the seat warmer or
airventilation system.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers
due to the possibility of excess
heating or burns. The seat warmer
may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
In particular, the driver must exercise extreme care for the following
types of passengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or handicapped persons, or hospital outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
OTQC031161E
C010104CTQ
Headrest
The driver's and front passenger's seats
are equipped with a headrest for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for the driver and front passenger, but
also helps to protect the head and neck
in the event of a collision.
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height of the center of gravity of
an occupant's head. Generally,
the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with the
height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. For this
reason, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed as severe
injury to the occupants may
occur in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protection against neck injuries when
properly adjusted.
• Do not adjust the headrest position of the driver's seat while the
vehicle is in motion.
OFD037037
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
3 7
Safety features of your vehicle
OYFH034205
CAUTION
If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the head restraint and
seat cushion raised, the head
restraint may come in contact with
the sunvisor or other parts of the
vehicle.
OTQ033200
OTQ033201
Removal
To remove the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback (2) with the
recline lever (1).
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.
3. Press the headrest release button (3)
while pulling the headrest up (4).
Reinstall
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
holes while pressing the release button
(1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the
recline lever (3).
3. Adjust the headrest to the appropriate
height.
WARNING
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed.
WARNING
Always make sure the headrest
locks into position after reinstalling
and adjusting it properly.
3 8
Safety features of your vehicle
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and make
sure the seat is locked securely by trying
to move forward and backward without
using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
Type A
OTQ037011
OTQ037036
Type B
C010108AUN
Seatback pocket (if equipped)
The seatback pocket is provided on the
back of the front passenger’s and driver’s
seatbacks.
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp objects
in the seatback pockets. In an accident they could come loose from
the pocket and injure vehicle occupants.
OTQ037011G
Rear seat adjustment
C010301ATQ
Forward and backward (2nd and 3rd
row, if equipped)
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment lever
under the front edge of the seat cushion and hold it.
3 9
Safety features of your vehicle
Type A
OTQ037012
Type B
To recline the seatback:
1. Pull or pull up the seatback recline
lever.
2. Carefully lean back the seat and adjust
the seatback to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seatback is locked in place. (The lever
MUST return to its original position for
the seatback to lock.)
OTQ037033
Seat rotation
(2nd row seat, if equipped)
Pull the lever and rotate the seat clockwise.
OTQ037012G
Type C
OTQ037015
C010302ATQ
Seatback angle (if equipped)
3 10
WARNING
• Never rotate the seat while the
vehicle is in motion.
• When the seat is rotated, be sure
that the seat is securely locked in
position. It not, it may result in
serious injury in the event of a
sudden stop.
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
OTQC031161F
C010303CTQ
Headrest
The rear seats are equipped with headrests in the outboard seating positions
(except center seating position) for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort for
passengers, but also helps to protect the
head and neck in the event of a collision.
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height of the center of gravity of
an occupant's head. Generally,
the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with the
height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. The use
of a cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback is not
recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed as severe
injury to an occupant may occur
in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protection against severe neck injuries
when properly adjusted.
OHM038017
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
CAUTION
When there is no occupant in the
rear seats, adjust the height of the
headrest to the lowest position. The
rear seat headrest can reduce the
visibility of the rear area.
3 11
Safety features of your vehicle
CAUTION - Damaging rear
seat belt buckles
When you fold the rear (2nd and/or
3rd row) seatback, insert the buckle
in the pocket between the rear seatback and cushion. Doing so can
prevent the buckle from being damaged by the rear seatback.
OHM038018N
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button
(1) while pulling upward (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the headrest poles (3) into the holes while pressing the release button (1). Then adjust it
to the appropriate height.
WARNING
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to properly protect the occupants.
3 12
OTQ037031
C010304ATQ
Center seat folding (if equipped)
1. Stow the rear seat belt in the pocket to
prevent the seat belt from being damaged.
2. Pull the release knob and fold the
seatback forward.
3. Fold up the seat.
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, hold the seatback
and return it slowly. If the seatback
is returned without holding it, the
back of the seat could spring forward resulting in injury caused by
being struck by the seatback.
CAUTION - Rear seat belts
When returning the rear (2nd and/or
3rd row) seatbacks to the upright
position, remember to return the
rear shoulder belts to their proper
position. Routing the seat belt webbing through the rear seat belt
guides will help keep the belts from
being trapped behind or under the
seats.
Safety features of your vehicle
C010307ATQ
Folding the rear seat
(4th row seat, if equipped)
The rear seat cushion may be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
To fold the rear seat:
1. Stow the rear seat belt in the pocket
to prevent the seat belt from being
damaged.
2. Set the 3rd row seatback to the upright
position and if necessary, slide the 3rd
row seat forward.
WARNING
The purpose of the fold rear seat is
to allow you to carry longer objects
that could not be accommodated in
the cargo area.
Never allow passengers to sit on a
improper position (ex : top of the
folded seat, floor etc.) while the car
is moving as this is not a proper
seating position and no seat belts
are available for use. This could
result in serious injury or death in
case of an accident or sudden stop.
Objects carried on the cargo area
should not extend higher than the
top of the front seatbacks. Doing
this could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage
during sudden stops.
OTQ037016
OTQ037017
3. Pull on the seatcushion folding lever,
then fold the seat toward the rear of the
vehicle.
4. Increase the luggauge compartment
space by moving the rear seat using
the sliding lever.
3 13
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
When you return the rear seat
cushion to its locking position after
being folded:
Be careful not to damage the seat
belt webbing or buckle. Do not
allow the seat belt webbing or
buckle to get caught or pinched in
the rear seat. Ensure that the seat
is completely locked into its proper
position by pushing the seat cushion and seatback.
Otherwise, in an accident or sudden stop, the seat could fold, which
could result in serious injury or
death.
3 14
WARNING - Cargo
Cargo should always be secured to
prevent it from being thrown about
the vehicle in a collision and causing injury to the vehicle occupants.
Do not place objects in the rear
seats, since they cannot be properly secured and may hit the front
seat occupants in a collision.
OUN026140
WARNING
The headrest on the seat (especially the last row seat) should be
adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height as the top
of the occupant's eyes.
If the tailgate is pushed down to
close when a passenger's head is
not against a properly adjusted
headrest or a tall person is seated,
the tailgate may hit the occupant's
head, which could cause injury.
WARNING - Cargo loading
Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transmission is in P
(Park) or the manual transmission
is in R (Reverse) or 1st, and the
parking brake is securely applied
whenever loading or unloading
cargo. Failure to take these steps
may allow the vehicle to move if the
shift lever is inadvertently moved to
another position.
Safety features of your vehicle
SEAT BELTS
C020100CUN
Seat belt restraint system
WARNING
• For maximum restraint system
protection, the seat belts must
always be used whenever the car
is moving.
• Seat belts are most effective
when seatbacks are in the
upright position.
• Children age 12 and under must
always be properly restrained in
the rear seat. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. If a child over 12 must
be seated in the front seat, he/she
must be properly belted and the
seat should be moved as far back
as possible.
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back. An improperly positioned
shoulder belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash. The shoulder
belt should be positioned midway
over your shoulder across your
collarbone.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never wear a seat belt over fragile objects. If there is a sudden
stop or impact, the seat belt can
damage it.
• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.
A twisted belt can't do its job as
well. In a collision, it could even
cut into you. Be sure the belt
webbing is straight and not twisted.
• Be careful not to damage the belt
webbing or hardware. If the belt
webbing or hardware is damaged, replace it.
WARNING
Seat belts are designed to bear
upon the bony structure of the
body, and should be worn low
across the front of the pelvis, or the
pelvis, chest and shoulders, as
applicable; wearing the lap section
of the belt across the abdominal
area must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection
for which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the occupant.
Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oils and chemicals and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may
safely be carried out using mild
soap and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes
frayed, contaminated or damaged.
(Continued)
3 15
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
It is essential to replace the entire
assembly after it has been worn in
a severe impact even if damage to
the assembly is not obvious. Belts
should not be worn with straps
twisted. Each seat belt assembly
must only be used by one occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt
around a child being carried on the
occupant's lap.
3 16
WARNING
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the seat
belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent
the seat belt assembly from being
adjusted to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt, be
careful not to latch the seat belt in
buckles of other seat. It's very dangerous and you may not be protected by the seat belt properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt and
do not fasten and unfasten the
seat belt repeatedly while driving.
This could result in loss of control, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
• When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt does
not pass over objects that are
hard or can break easily.
• Make sure there is nothing in the
buckle. The seat belt may not be
fastened securely.
1GQA2083
D150302AEN-EE
Seat belt warning (if equipped)
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will blink for approximately
6 seconds each time you turn the ignition
switch ON regardless of belt fastening.
If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened after
the ignition switch is ON, the seat belt
warning light blinks again for approximately 6 seconds.
Seat belt warning chime (if equipped)
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned ON or
if it is unfastened after the ignition switch
is ON, the seat belt warning chime will
sound for approximately 6 seconds. At
this time, if the seat belt is fastened, the
chime will stop at once.
Safety features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
belt out and release it. Then you will be
able to pull the belt out smoothly.
B200A02NF
B180A01NF-1
C020102AEN
Lap/shoulder belt
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into
the buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will
extend and let you move around. If there
is a sudden stop or impact, however, the
belt will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
WARNING
You should place the lap belt portion as low as possible and snugly
across your hips, not on your waist.
If the lap belt is located too high on
your waist, it may increase the
chance of injury in the event of a
collision. Both arms should not be
under or over the belt. Rather, one
should be over and the other under,
as shown in the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under the
arm nearest the door.
3 17
Safety features of your vehicle
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).
To lower it, push it down (3) while pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has locked
into position.
Front seat
WARNING
OEN036029
Height adjustment (if equipped)
You can adjust the height of the shoulder
belt anchor to one of 5 positions for maximum comfort and safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too near your neck. The
shoulder portion should be adjusted so
that it lies across your chest and midway
over your shoulder nearest the door and
not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster
into an appropriate position.
3 18
• Verify the shoulder belt anchor is
locked into position at the appropriate height. Never position the
shoulder belt across your neck or
face. Improperly positioned seat
belts can cause serious injuries
in an accident.
• Failure to replace seat belts after
an accident could leave you with
damaged seat belts that will not
provide protection in the event of
another collision leading to personal injury or death. Replace
your seat belts after being in an
accident as soon as possible.
B210A01NF-1
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing the
release button (1) in the locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the belt to
be sure it is not twisted, then try again.
Safety features of your vehicle
OHM039105N
B220A04NF-1
OTQ037020
C020103AUN
Lap belt (if equipped)
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten a 2-point static type belt, insert
the metal tab (1) into the locking buckle
(2). There will be an audible "click" when
the tab locks into the buckle. Check to
make sure the belt is properly locked and
that the belt is not twisted.
When using the rear center seat belt, the
buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be
used.
Too high
Correct
Shorten
B220B01NF
With a 2-point static type seat belt, the
length must be adjusted manually so it
fits snugly around your body. Fasten the
belt and pull on the loose end to tighten.
The belt should be placed as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist. If
the belt is too high, it could increase the
possibility of your being injured in an
accident.
3 19
Safety features of your vehicle
C020105AUN
Type A
Stowing the rear seat belt
• The rear seat belt buckles can be
stowed in the pocket between the rear
seatback and cushion when not in use.
• The center seat belt can be stowed
with the plate and webbing rolled in the
pocket between the rear seatback and
cushion.
OTQ037021
Type B
B210A02NF-1
To release the seat belt:
When you want to release the seat belt,
press the button (1) in the locking buckle.
WARNING
The center lap belt latching mechanism is different from those for the
rear seat shoulder belts. When fastening the rear seat shoulder belts
or the center lap belt, make sure
they are inserted into the correct
buckles to obtain maximum protection from the seat belt system and
assure proper operation.
OTQ037022
Type C
OTQ037022G
3 20
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
For your safety, be sure that the
belt webbing is not loose or twisted
and always sit properly on your
seat.
OED030300
C020200CEN
Pre-tensioner seat belt
(if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and
front passenger's pre-tensioner seat
belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is
to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly
against the occupant's body in certain
frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat
belts may be activated in crashes where
the frontal collision is severe enough.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if
the occupant tries to lean forward too
quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock
into position. In certain frontal collisions,
the pre-tensioner will activate and pull
the seat belt into tighter contact against
the occupant's body.
1KMB3311A
The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists mainly of the following components.
Their locations are shown in the illustration:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
3 21
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
To obtain maximum benefit from a
pre-tensioner seat belt:
1. The seat belt must be worn correctly and adjusted to the proper
position. Please read and follow
all of the important information
and precautions about your vehicle’s occupant safety features –
including seat belts and air bags –
that are provided in this manual.
2. Be sure you and your passengers
always wear seat belts properly.
✽ NOTICE
• Both the driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be
activated in certain frontal collisions.
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are
activated, a loud noise may be heard
and fine dust, which may appear to be
smoke, may be visible in the passenger
compartment. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.
• Although it is harmless, the fine dust
may cause skin irritation and should
not be breathed for prolonged periods.
Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly after an accident in which the pretensioner seat belts were activated.
3 22
✽ NOTICE
Because the sensor that activates the
SRS air bag is connected with the pretensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag
warning light
on the instrument
panel will illuminate for approximately
6 seconds after the ignition switch has
been turned to the ON position, and
then it should turn off.
CAUTION
If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not
working properly, this warning light
will illuminate even if there is no
malfunction of the SRS air bag.
If the SRS air bag warning light
does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to ON, or if it
remains illuminated after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds, or
if it illuminates while the vehicle is
being driven, we recommend that
the system be inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
• Pre-tensioners are designed to
operate only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts
must be replaced. All seat belts,
of any type, should always be
replaced after they have been
worn during a collision.
• The pre-tensioner seat belt
assembly mechanisms become
hot during activation. Do not
touch the pre-tensioner seat belt
assemblies for several minutes
after they have been activated.
• Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself. We recommend
that the system be inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not strike the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies.
• Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat belt
system in any manner.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Improper handling of the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies, and
failure to heed the warnings not
to strike, modify, inspect, replace,
service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies may lead
to improper operation or inadvertent activation and serious injury.
• Always wear the seat belts when
driving or riding in a motor vehicle.
• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner
seat belt must be discarded, we
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Body work on the front area of the
vehicle may damage the pre-tensioner seat belt system. Therefore,
we recommend that the system be
serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
C020300AUN
C020306AUN
Seat belt precautions
Infant or small child
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat. For
more information about the use of these
restraints, refer to “Child restraint system” in this section.
WARNING
All occupants of the vehicle must
wear their seat belts at all times.
Seat belts and child restraints
reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries for all occupants in the
event of a collision or sudden stop.
Without a seat belt, occupants
could be shifted too close to a
deploying air bag, strike the interior
structure or be thrown from the
vehicle. Properly worn seat belts
greatly reduce these hazards.
Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and occupant seating contained in this manual.
WARNING
Every person in your vehicle needs
to be properly restrained at all
times, including infants and children. Never hold a child in your
arms or lap when riding in a vehicle. The violent forces created during a crash will tear the child from
your arms and throw the child
against the interior. Always use a
child restraint appropriate for your
child's height and weight.
3 23
Safety features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Small children are best protected from
injury in an accident when properly
restrained in the rear seat by a child
restraint system that meets the requirements of the Safety Standards of your
country. Before buying any child restraint
system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets Safety Standards of
your country. The restraint must be
appropriate for your child's height and
weight. Check the label on the child
restraint for this information. Refer to
“Child restraint system” in this section.
C020301AUN
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occupy
the rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should
be fastened snug on the hips and as low
as possible. Check belt fit periodically. A
child's squirming could put the belt out of
position. Children are afforded the most
safety in the event of an accident when
they are restrained by a proper restraint
system in the rear seat.
3 24
If a larger child (over age 12) must be
seated in the front seat, the child should
be securely restrained by the available
lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be
placed in the rearmost position.
Children age 12 and under should be
restrained securely in the rear seat.
NEVER place a child age 12 and under
in the front seat. NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the child’s neck or face, try placing the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If
the shoulder belt still touches their face
or neck they need to be returned to a
child restraint system.
WARNING - Shoulder belts
on small children
• Never allow a shoulder belt to be
in contact with a child’s neck or
face while the vehicle is in
motion.
• If seat belts are not properly worn
and adjusted on children, there is
a risk of death or serious injury.
C020302AUN
Pregnant women
The use of a seat belt is recommended
for pregnant women to lessen the chance
of injury in an accident. When a seat belt
is used, the lap belt portion should be
placed as low and snugly as possible on
the hips, not across the abdomen. For
specific recommendations, consult a
physician.
C020303AUN
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should consult a physician for recommendations.
C020304AUN
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
Safety features of your vehicle
C020305AUN
C020400AEN
C020401AEN
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve maximum effectiveness of the restraint system, all passengers should be sitting up
and the front and rear seats should be in
an upright position when the car is moving. A seat belt cannot provide proper
protection if the person is lying down in
the rear seat or if the front and rear seats
are in a reclined position.
Care of seat belts
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind.
Any damaged parts should be replaced
as soon as possible.
WARNING
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious or
fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop. The protection
of your restraint system (seat belts
and air bags) is greatly reduced by
reclining your seat. Seat belts must
be snug against your hips and
chest to work properly. The more
the seatback is reclined, the greater
the chance that an occupant's hips
will slide under the lap belt causing
serious internal injuries or the
occupant's neck could strike the
shoulder belt. Drivers and passengers should always sit well back in
their seats, properly belted, and
with the seatbacks upright.
Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addition, care
should be taken to assure that seat belts
and belt hardware are not damaged by
seat hinges, doors or other abuse.
C020402AUN
WARNING
When you return the rear seat to its
seating position after the rear seat
has been folded, be careful not to
damage the seat belt webbing or
buckle. Be sure that the webbing or
buckle does not get caught or
pinched in the rear seat. A seat belt
with damaged webbing or buckle
could possibly fail during a collision or sudden stop, resulting in
serious injury. If the webbing or
buckles are damaged, get them
replaced immediately.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.
If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution
and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong
detergents or abrasives should not be
used because they may damage and
weaken the fabric.
C020403AEN
When to replace seat belts
Entire in-use seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an accident.
This should be done even if no damage
is visible. If you have additional questions
regarding seat belt operation, we recommend that you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
3 25
Safety features of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
C030000AEN
Children riding in the car should sit in the
rear seat and must always be properly
restrained to minimize the risk of injury in
an accident, sudden stop or sudden
maneuver. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in the
front seat. Larger children not in a child
restraint should use one of the seat belts
provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant safety seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat.
You must use a commercially available
child restraint system that meets the
requirements of the Safety Standards of
your country. Child restraint systems are
designed to be secured in vehicle seats
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt, or by a tether anchor
and/or ISOFIX anchors (if equipped).
Children could be injured or killed in a
crash if their restraints are not properly
secured. For small children and babies, a
child seat or infant seat must be used.
Before buying a particular child restraint
system, make sure it fits your car seat
and seat belts, and fits your child.
Follow all the instructions provided by the
manufacturer when installing the child
restraint system.
3 26
WARNING
• A child restraint system must be
placed in the rear seat. Never
install a child or infant seat on the
front passenger's seat. Should an
accident occur and cause the
passenger-side air bag to deploy,
it could severely injure or kill an
infant or child seated in an infant
or child seat. Thus only use a
child restraint in the rear seat of
your vehicle.
• A seat belt or child restraint system can become very hot if it is
left in a closed vehicle on a sunny
day, even if the outside temperature does not feel hot. Be sure to
check the seat cover and buckles
before placing a child there.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the child restraint system
is not in use, store it in the luggage area or fasten it with a seat
belt so that it will not be thrown
forward in the case of a sudden
stop or an accident.
• Children may be seriously injured
or killed by an inflating air bag.
All children, even those too large
for child restraints, must ride in
the rear seat.
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries:
• Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
A child riding in the front passenger seat can be forcefully struck
by an inflating air bag resulting in
serious or fatal injuries.
• Always follow the child restraint
system manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use of
the child restraint.
• Always make sure the child seat
is secured properly in the car and
your child is securely restrained
in the child seat.
• Never hold a child in your arms or
lap when riding in a vehicle. The
violent forces created during a
crash will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the car’s interior.
• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash,
the belt could press deep into the
child causing serious internal
injuries.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle – not even for a short
time. The car can heat up very
quickly, resulting in serious
injuries to children inside. Even
very young children may inadvertently cause the vehicle to move,
entangle themselves in the windows, or lock themselves or others inside the vehicle.
• Never allow two children, or any
two persons, to use the same
seat belt.
• Children often squirm and reposition themselves improperly.
Never let a child ride with the
shoulder belt under their arm or
behind their back. Always properly position and secure children in
the rear seat.
• Never allow a child to stand-up or
kneel on the seat or floor of a
moving vehicle. During a collision or sudden stop, the child
can be violently thrown against
the vehicle’s interior, resulting in
serious injury.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never use an infant carrier or a
child safety seat that "hooks"
over a seatback, it may not provide adequate security in an accident.
• Seat belts can become very hot,
especially when the car is parked
in direct sunlight. Always check
seat belt buckles before fastening them over a child.
• After an accident, we recommend
that the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
3 27
Safety features of your vehicle
For safety reasons, we recommend that
the child restraint system be used in the
rear seats.
Rearward-facing child restraint system
WARNING
CRS09
Forward-facing child restraint system
OTQ037038
C030100AEN
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the use of
a child seat or infant seat is required. This
child seat or infant seat should be of
appropriate size for the child and should
be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3 28
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger
seat, because of the danger that an
inflating passenger-side air bag
could impact the rear-facing child
restraint and kill the child.
WARNING - Child seat
installation
• A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the car and the child is not
properly restrained in the child
restraint. Before installing the
child restraint system, read the
instructions supplied by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
• If the seat belt does not operate
as described in this section, we
recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Failure to observe this manual's
instructions regarding child
restraint systems and the
instructions provided with the
child restraint system could
increase the chance and/or
severity of injury in an accident.
• If the vehicle headrest prevents
proper installation of a child seat
(as described in the child seat
system manual, the headrest of
the respective seating position
shall be readjusted or entirely
removed.
Safety features of your vehicle
1GHA2260
2. Extend the latch plate tongue of the
lap belt.
3. Route the lap belt through the restraint
according to the seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
4. Buckle the seat belt and adjust the lap
belt for a snug hold on the child
restraint by pulling on the loose end of
the belt. After installation of the child
restraint system, try to move it in all
directions to be sure the child restraint
system is securely installed.
E2MS103005
C030102AUN
Installing a child restraint system by
lap/shoulder belt (if equipped)
OTQ007002
C030101ATQ
Installing a child restraint system by
lap belt
To install a child restraint system on the
outboard or center rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the child restraint system on the
rear seat.
To install a child restraint system on the
outboard or center rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the child restraint system in the
seat and route the lap/shoulder belt
around or through the restraint, following the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
3 29
Safety features of your vehicle
OEN036101
OEN036104
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into
the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”
sound.
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
3. Buckle the seat belt and allow the seat
belt to take up any slack. After installation of the child restraint system, try to
move it in all directions to be sure the
child restraint system is securely
installed.
If you need to tighten the belt, pull more
webbing toward the retractor. When you
unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to
retract, the retractor will automatically
revert back to its normal seated passenger emergency locking usage condition.
3 30
1GHA2260
C030101AUN
Installing a child restraint system by
lap belt (on the center rear seat) (if
equipped) - Except Europe
To install a child restraint system on the
center rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the child restraint system on the
center rear seat.
2. Extend the latch plate tongue of the
lap belt.
3. Route the lap belt through the restraint
according to the seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
4. Buckle the seat belt and adjust the lap
belt for a snug hold on the child
restraint by pulling on the loose end of
the belt. After installation of the child
restraint system, try to move it in all
directions to be sure the child restraint
system is securely installed.
Safety features of your vehicle
C030105ATQ
Child seat restraint suitability for seat position using the seat belt - For Europe
Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your
children. When using the child safety seats, refer to the following table.
8-seater Wagon
Seating position
Age group
0 : Up to 10 kg
(0 - 9 months)
0+ : Up to 13 kg
(0 - 2 years)
I : 9 kg to 18 kg
(9 months - 4 years)
II & III : 15 kg to 36 kg
(4 - 12 years)
Front
passenger
2nd
outboard
2nd
center
3rd
outboard
3rd
center
X
X
X
U
U
L4
L4
L4
U
U
L1, L2, L3
L1, L2, L3
L1, L2, L3
U
U
X
X
X
U
U
5/6-seater Van
Seating position
Age group
0 : Up to 10 kg
(0 - 9 months)
0+ : Up to 13 kg
(0 - 2 years)
I : 9 kg to 18 kg
(9 months - 4 years)
II & III : 15 kg to 36 kg
(4 - 12 years)
Front
passenger
Front
center
2nd
outboard
2nd
center
X
X
X
X
L4
X
L4
X
L1, L2, L3
X
L1, L2, L3
X
X
X
X
X
L1 : Suitable for Romer Lord Plus (E1
03301136) approved for the use in
this mass group
L2 : Suitable for Romer DUO (E1
3301133) approved for the use in
this mass group
L3 : Suitable for BeSafe iZi COMFORT
(E4 03443206) approved for the use
in this mass group
L4 : Suitable for Bebe comfort ELIOS
(E2 037014) approved for the use in
this mass group
U : Suitable for "universal" category
restraints approved for use in this
mass group
UF : Suitable for forward-facing "universal" category restraints approved
for the use in this mass group
X : Seat position not suitable for children
in this mass group
3 31
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the car and the child is not properly restrained in the child restraint.
Always follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
OTQ037039L
C030103ATQ
Securing a child restraint seat with
“Tether Anchor” system
(if equipped)
Child restraint hook holders are located
behind the rear seats.
3 32
2GHA3300L
1. Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable headrest,
route the tether strap under the headrest and between the headrest posts,
otherwise route the tether strap over
the top of the seatback.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
appropriate child restraint hook holder
and tighten to secure the seat.
WARNING - Tether strap
Never mount more than one child
restraint to a single tether or to a
single lower anchorage point. The
increased load caused by multiple
seats may cause the tethers or
anchorage points to break, causing
serious injury or death.
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Child restraint
check
Check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing and
pulling it in different directions.
Incorrectly fitted child restraints
may swing, twist, tip or separate
causing death or serious injury.
WARNING
- Child restraint anchorage
• Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses or
for attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
• The tether strap may not work
properly if attached somewhere
other than the correct tether
anchor.
OTQ038161E
C030104BTQ
Securing a child restraint system
with “ISOFIX” system and “Tether
Anchorage” system (if equipped)
ISOFIX is a standardised method of fitting child seats that eliminates the need
to use the standard adult seat belt to
secure the seat in the vehicle. This
enables a much more secure and positive location with the added benefit of
easier and quicker installation.
An ISOFIX-seat can only be installed if it
has vehicle-specific approval in accordance with the requirements of ECER44.
OTQ037040L
There are ISOFIX marks located on the
lower portion of each side of the rear
seatbacks. These marks indicate the
position of the lower anchors for child
restraints so equipped.
3 33
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
Install the child restraint seat fully
rearward against the seatback with
the seatback in a vertical position,
not reclined.
WARNING
OUN036140L
On each side of the rear seat, between
the cushion and backrest, are located a
pair of ISOFIX anchorage points together with a top tether mounting behind the
rear seats. During the installation, the
seat has to be engaged at the anchorage-points in a way you can hear it clicking (check by pulling!) and has to be fixed
with the Top Tether-belt on the belonging
point behind rear seats.
The installing and the use of a child-seat
has to be done according to the
installing-manual, which is added to the
ISOFIX-seat.
3 34
• When using the vehicle's
"ISOFIX" system to install a child
restraint system in the rear seat,
all unused vehicle rear seat belt
metal latch plates or tabs must be
latched securely in their seat belt
buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted behind
the child restraint to prevent the
child from reaching and taking
hold of unretracted seat belts.
Unlatched metal latch plates or
tabs may allow the child to reach
the unretracted seat belts which
may result in strangulation and a
serious injury or death to the
child in the child restraint.
• Do not place anything around the
lower anchors. Also make sure
that the seat belt is not caught in
the lower anchors.
To secure the child restraint seat
1. To engage the child restraint seat to
the ISOFIX anchor, insert the child
restraint seat latch into the ISOFIX
anchor. Listen for the audible “click”
sound.
CAUTION
Do not allow the rear seat belt webbing to get scratched or pinched by
the ISOFIX-seat latch and ISOFIX
anchor during the installation.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
child restraint hook holder and tighten
to secure the seat. (Refer to the previous page.)
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Do not install a child restraint
seat at the center of the rear seat
using the vehicle's ISOFIX
anchors. The ISOFIX anchors are
only provided for the left and
right outboard rear seating positions. Do not misuse the ISOFIX
anchors by attempting to attach a
child restraint seat in the middle
of the rear seat to the ISOFIX
anchors. In a crash, the child
restraint seat ISOFIX attachments
may not be strong enough to
secure the child restraint seat
properly in the center of the rear
seat and may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Do not mount more than one
child restraint to a child restraint
lower anchorage point. The
improper increased load may
cause the anchorage points or
tether anchor to break, causing
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child restraint seat only to
the appropriate locations shown
in the illustration.
• Always follow the installation and
use instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child
restraint.
3 35
Safety features of your vehicle
C030106ATQ
Child seat restraint suitability for vehicle ISOFIX positions- For Europe
vehicle ISOFIX positions
Mass Group
Size Class
Fixture
Front Passenger
Carrycot
0 : UP to 10kg
0+ : UP to 13kg
I : 9 to 18kg
F
ISO/L1
-
IUF
G
ISO/L2
-
IUF
E
ISO/R1
-
IUF
E
ISO/R1
-
IUF
D
ISO/R2
-
IUF
C
ISO/R3
-
IUF
D
ISO/R2
-
IUF
C
ISO/R3
-
IUF
B
ISO/F2
-
IUF
B1
ISO/F2X
-
IUF
A
ISO/F3
-
IUF
IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of
universal category approved for use in the mass group.
* Both ISO/R2 and ISO/R3 are able to be set up only at the
foremost position of the passenger seat.
* ISOFIX child restraint system size classes and fixtures
A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height
720mm)
B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS
(height 650mm)
3 36
Rear Outboard
B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface
Shape Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height 650mm)
C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS
D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS
E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing CRS
F - ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
Safety features of your vehicle
Recommended child restraint systems - For Europe
Mass Group
Group 0-1
(0-18kg)
Group 1
(9-18kg)
Name
Part. No.
Manufacturer
Type of Fixation
ECE-R44
Approval No.
Britax Römer
Rearward facing with ISOFIX Base
E1 04301146
Britax Römer
Forward facing with vehicle ISOFIX lower
anchorage + Top Tether
E1 04301133
Baby Safe Plus
Part. No. E8945-66001
Part. No. E8945-66029
Duo Plus
Part. No. E8945-66011
CRS Manufacturer information
Britax Römer
http://www.britax.com
3 37
Safety features of your vehicle
AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
C040000BTQ
(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag*
* : if equipped
WARNING
• Even in vehicles with air bags,
you and your passengers must
always wear the safety belts provided in order to minimize the
risk and severity of injury in the
event of a collision or rollover.
• SRS and pretensioners contain
explosive chemicals. If scraping
a vehicle without removing SRS
and pretensioners from a vehicle,
it may cause fire. Before scraping
a vehicle, we recommend that
you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Keep the SRS parts and wirings
away from water or any liquid. If
the SRS components are inoperative due to exposure to water or
liquids, it may cause fire or
severe injury.
* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OTQ037023
3 38
Safety features of your vehicle
C040900ATQ
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if
necessary) only when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or START
position.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of
a serious frontal collision in order to
help protect the occupants from serious physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which the
air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a collision and its direction. These two factors determine whether the sensors
produce an electronic deployment/
inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the density and stiffness of the vehicles or
objects which your vehicle hits in the
collision. The determining factors are
not limited to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an accident.
It is much more likely that you will simply see the deflated air bags hanging
out of their storage compartments after
the collision.
• In order to help provide protection in a
severe collision, the air bags must
inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag
inflation is a consequence of the
extremely short time in which a collision
occurs and the need to inflate the air
bag between the occupant and the
vehicle structures before the occupant
impacts those structures. This speed of
inflation reduces the risk of serious or
life-threatening injuries in a severe collision and is thus a necessary part of air
bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include facial
abrasions, bruises and broken bones
because the inflation speed also causes the air bags to expand with a great
deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the steering wheel air bag can cause fatal
injuries, especially if the occupant
is positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel.
WARNING
• To avoid severe personal injury
or death caused by deploying air
bags in a collision, the driver
should sit as far back from the
steering wheel air bag as possible (at least 250 mm (10 inches)
away). The front passengers
should always move their seats
as far back as possible and sit
back in their seat.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the
event of collision, and passengers may be injured by the air bag
expansion force if they are not in
proper position.
• Air bag inflation may cause
injuries including facial or bodily
abrasions, injuries from broken
glasses or burns.
3 39
Safety features of your vehicle
C040902ATQ
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make a
loud noise and they leave smoke and
powder in the air inside of the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the ignition of the air bag inflator. After the air
bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breathing due to the contact of
your chest with both the seat belt and the
air bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. Open your doors
and/or windows as soon as possible
after impact in order to reduce discomfort and prevent prolonged exposure to the smoke and powder.
Though the smoke and powder are nontoxic, they may cause irritation to the skin
(eyes, nose and throat, etc). If this is the
case, wash and rinse with cold water
immediately and consult a doctor if the
symptom persists.
■ Type A
C040903ATQ
1JBH3051
■ Type B
WARNING
OYDESA2042
■ Type C
WARNING
When the air bags deploy, the air
bag related parts in the steering
wheel and/or instrument panel are
very hot. To prevent injury, do not
touch the air bag storage area’s
internal components immediately
after an air bag has inflated.
3 40
Do not install a child restraint on the
front passenger’s seat
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger’s seat. If the air
bag deploys, it would impact the rear-facing child restraint, causing serious or
fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing child
restraints in the front passenger’s seat
either. If the front passenger air bag
inflates, it could cause serious or fatal
injuries to the child.
OLM034310
• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a
rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it!
• Never put a child restraint in the
front passenger’s seat. If the front
passenger air bag inflates, it can
cause serious or fatal injuries.
Safety features of your vehicle
OTQ038160L
W7-147
C041000AEN
C040100ATQ
Air bag warning light
SRS components and functions
The purpose of the air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert you of
a potential problem with your air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the warning light should illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds, then go off.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is
in motion.
The SRS consists of the following components:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module*
3. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies*
4. Air bag warning light
5. SRS control module (SRSCM)
6. Front impact sensors
*: if equipped
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require air
bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat
belt deployment.
The SRS air bag warning light on the
instrument panel will illuminate for about
6 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, after which the
SRS air bag warning light should go out.
If any of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction of the SRS.
We recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is
in motion.
3 41
Safety features of your vehicle
Driver’s front air bag (1)
Driver’s front air bag (2)
Driver’s front air bag (3)
B240B01L
B240B02L
B240B03L
The front air bag modules are located
both in the center of the steering wheel
and in the front passenger's panel above
the glove box. When the SRSCM detects
a sufficiently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically deploy
the front air bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams molded
directly into the pad covers will separate
under pressure from the expansion of the
air bags. Further opening of the covers
then allows full inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combination
with a properly worn seat belt, slows the
driver's or the passenger's forward
motion, reducing the risk of head and
chest injury.
3 42
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling the
driver to maintain forward visibility and
the ability to steer or operate other controls.
Safety features of your vehicle
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING
B240B05L
WARNING
• Do not install or place any accessories (drink holder, cassette
holder, sticker, etc.) on the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box in a vehicle with a passenger's air bag. Such objects
may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the passenger's air bag inflates.
• When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the
instrument cluster nor on the
instrument panel surface.
It may become a dangerous projectile and cause injury if the passenger's air bag inflates.
• If an air bag deploys, there may
be a loud noise followed by a fine
dust released in the vehicle.
These conditions are normal and
are not hazardous - the air bags
are packed in this fine powder.
The dust generated during air
bag deployment may cause skin
or eye irritation as well as aggravate asthma for some persons.
Always wash all exposed skin
areas thoroughly with lukewarm
water and a mild soap after an
accident in which the air bags
were deployed.
• The SRS can function only when
the ignition switch is in the ON
position. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate, or
continuously remains on after
illuminating for about 6 seconds
when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position, or after the
engine is started, comes on while
driving, the SRS is not working
properly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If this occurs, we recommend
that the system be inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Before you replace a fuse or disconnect a battery terminal, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and remove the ignition
key. Never remove or replace the
air bag related fuse(s) when the
ignition switch is in the ON position. Failure to heed this warning
will cause the SRS air bag warning light to illuminate.
3 43
Safety features of your vehicle
Driver’s front air bag
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING
OTQ037024
C040400BTQ
Driver's and passenger's front air
bag (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System
and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver
and passenger seating positions. The
indications of the system's presence are
the letters "SRS AIR BAG" embossed on
the air bag pad cover in the steering
wheel and the passenger's side front
panel pad above the glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags installed
under the pad covers in the center of the
steering wheel and the passenger's side
front panel above the glove box.
3 44
OTQ037025
The purpose of the SRS is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt system alone in
case of a frontal impact of sufficient
severity.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints – every trip, every time,
everyone! Air bags inflate with considerable force and in the blink of
an eye. Seat belts help keep occupants in proper position to obtain
maximum benefit from the air bag.
Even with air bags, improperly and
unbelted occupants can be severely injured when the air bag inflates.
Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and occupant safety contained in this manual.
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries and receive the maximum safety benefit from your
restraint system:
• Never place a child in any child or
booster seat in the front seat.
• ABC – Always Buckle Children in
the back seat. It is the safest
place for children of any age to
ride.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Front air bags can injure occupants improperly positioned in
the front seats.
• Move your seat as far back as
practical from the front air bags,
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
• You and your passengers should
never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags. Improperly
positioned drivers and passengers can be severely injured by
inflating air bags.
• Never lean against the door or
center console – always sit in an
upright position.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's
panel above the glove box,
because any such object could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to deploy.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to accidental deployment of the air bags
or by rendering the SRS inoperative.
• If the SRS air bag warning light
remains illuminated while the
vehicle is being driven, we recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Air bags can only be used once –
we recommend that the system
be replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• The SRS is designed to deploy
the front air bags only when an
impact is sufficiently severe and
when the impact angle is less
than 30° from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle.
Additionally, the air bags will only
deploy once. Seat belts must be
worn at all times.
• Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rearimpact or rollover crashes. In
addition, front air bags will not
deploy in frontal crashes below
the deployment threshold.
(Continued)
3 45
Safety features of your vehicle
Rear impact
OTQ036087G
Side impact
1TQA2088
Rollover
1TQA2091
3 46
(Continued)
• A child restraint system must
never be placed in the front seat.
The infant or child could be
severely injured or killed by an air
bag deployment in case of an
accident.
• Children age 12 and under must
always be properly restrained in
the rear seat. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. If a child over 12 must
be seated in the front seat, he or
she must be properly belted and
the seat should be moved as far
back as possible.
• For maximum safety protection in
all types of crashes, all occupants including the driver should
always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position
to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a
crash. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the air bag while
the vehicle is in motion.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious or fatal
injury in a crash. All occupants
should sit upright with the seat
back in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with
their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on
the floor until the vehicle is
parked and the ignition key is
removed.
• The SRS air bag system must
deploy very rapidly to provide
protection in a crash. If an occupant is out of position because of
not wearing a seat belt, the air
bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal
injuries.
Safety features of your vehicle
C040800BTQ
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents in
which the air bag would not be expected to provide additional protection.
These include rear impacts, second or
third collisions in multiple impact
accidents, as well as low speed
impacts.
1
2
OTQ037026/OTQ037027/OTQ037028
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module
(2) Front impact sensor
3 47
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Do not hit or allow any objects to
impact the locations where air
bags or sensors are installed.
This may cause unexpected air
bag deployment, which could
result in serious personal injury
or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered in
any way, the air bags may deploy
when they should not or they may
not deploy when they should,
causing severe injury or death.
Therefore, do not try to perform
maintenance on or around the air
bag sensors. We recommend that
the system be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
3 48
(Continued)
• Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed
due to the deformation of the
front bumper, body. We recommend that the system be serviced
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Your vehicle has been designed
to absorb impact and deploy the
air bag(s) in certain collisions.
Installing bumper guards or
replacing a bumper with non-genuine parts may adversely affect
your vehicle’s collision and air
bag deployment performance.
1TQA2084
C040801ATQ
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate in a
frontal collision depending on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the front
collision.
Safety features of your vehicle
Although the front air bags (driver’s and
front passenger’s air bags) are designed
to inflate only in frontal collisions, they
also may inflate in other types of collisions if the front impact sensors detect a
sufficient impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved roads,
the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully
on unimproved roads or on surfaces not
designed for vehicle traffic to prevent
unintended air bag deployment.
1TQA2086
C040802ATQ
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags are
designed not to deploy in such cases
because they may not provide benefits
beyond the protection of the seat belts
in such collisions.
OTQ036087
• Frontal air bags are not designed to
inflate in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case, inflated air bags would not be able to provide any additional benefit.
3 49
Safety features of your vehicle
1TQA2088
1TQA2089
OTQ052215
• Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move to the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag
deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.
• In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would not
be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not
deploy any air bags.
• Just before impact, drivers often brake
heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the
front portion of the vehicle causing it to
“ride” under a vehicle with a higher
ground clearance. Air bags may not
inflate in this "under-ride" situation
because deceleration forces that are
detected by sensors may be significantly reduced by such “under-ride”
collisions.
3 50
Safety features of your vehicle
C041100BTQ
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
and so there are no parts you can safely
service by yourself. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not illuminate or if it
continuously remains on, we recommend
that the system be inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
1TQA2091
1TQA2092
• Air bags may not inflate in rollover accidents because air bag deployment
would not provide protection to the
occupants.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated to one area and
the full force of the impact is not delivered to the sensors.
3 51
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Modification to SRS components
or wiring, including the addition
of any kind of badges to the pad
covers or modifications to the
body structure, can adversely
affect SRS performance and lead
to possible injury.
• For cleaning the air bag pad covers, use only a soft, dry cloth or
one which has been moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely affect
the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on the
steering wheel, instrument panel,
and the front passenger's panel
above the glove box, because any
such object could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a crash severe enough
to cause the air bags to inflate.
• If the air bags inflate, we recommend that the system be
replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
3 52
(Continued)
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring, or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to accidental inflation of the air bags or
by rendering the SRS inoperative.
• If components of the air bag system must be discarded, or if the
vehicle must be scrapped, certain
safety precautions must be
observed.
An
authorized
HYUNDAI dealer knows these
precautions and can give you the
necessary information. Failure to
follow these precautions and procedures could increase the risk
of personal injury.
• If your car was flooded and has
soaked carpeting or water on the
flooring, you shouldn't try to start
the engine; we recommend that
you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
C041300ATQ
Additional safety precautions
• Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a foldeddown back seat. All occupants should
sit upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor.
• Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not wearing a seat belt during a crash or emergency stop can be thrown against the
inside of the vehicle, against other
occupants, or out of the vehicle.
• Each seat belt is designed to
restrain one occupant. If more than
one person uses the same seat belt,
they could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
• Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the seat
belt can reduce the protection provided
by the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Passengers should not place hard
or sharp objects between themselves and the air bags. Carrying
hard or sharp objects on your lap or in
your mouth can result in injuries if an
air bag inflates.
Safety features of your vehicle
• Keep occupants away from the air
bag covers. All occupants should sit
upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor. If occupants are too close to the
air bag covers, they could be injured if
the air bags inflate.
• Do not attach or place objects on or
near the air bag covers. Any object
attached to or placed on the front air
bag covers could interfere with the
proper operation of the air bags.
• Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing
components.
• Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the operation
of the supplemental restraint system
sensing components and wiring harnesses.
• Never hold an infant or child on your
lap. The infant or child could be seriously injured or killed in the event of a
crash. All infants and children should
be properly restrained in appropriate
child safety seats or seat belts in the
rear seat.
WARNING
• Sitting improperly or out of position can cause occupants to be
shifted too close to a deploying
air bag, strike the interior structure or be thrown from the vehicle
resulting in serious injury or
death.
• Always sit upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with
your seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and your feet on
the floor.
C041400AUN
Adding equipment to or modifying
your air bag-equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
*
* : if equipped
OTQ037029
C041200AUN
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels are attached to
alert the driver and passengers of potential risk of air bag system.
Note that these government warnings
focus on the risk to children, we also
wants you to be aware of the risks which
adults are exposed to. Those have been
described in previous pages.
3 53
Keys / 4-2
Remote keyless entry / 4-4
Theft-alarm system / 4-6
Door locks / 4-8
Tailgate / 4-13
Windows / 4-16
Hood / 4-21
Fuel filler lid / 4-23
Features of your vehicle
Steering wheel / 4-26
Mirrors / 4-28
Instrument cluster / 4-32
Rear parking assist system / 4-47
Hazard warning flasher / 4-50
Lighting / 4-50
Wipers and washers / 4-55
Interior light / 4-58
Defroster / 4-60
Manual climate control system / 4-61
Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-72
Storage compartment / 4-73
Interior features / 4-76
Audio system / 4-82
4
Features of your vehicle
KEYS
D010100AEN
D010200AEN
Record your key number
Key operations
The key code number is
stamped on the key
code tag attached to the
key set. Should you lose
your keys, we recommend that you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Remove the key code tag and store it in
a safe place. Also, record the code number and keep it in a safe place (not in the
vehicle).
Used to start the engine, lock and unlock
the doors.
4 2
WARNING
- Ignition key
Leaving children unattended in a
vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous even if the key is not in the
ignition switch is ACC or ON position. Children copy adults and they
could place the key in the ignition
switch. The ignition key would
enable children to operate power
windows or other controls, or even
make the vehicle move, which
could result in serious bodily injury
or even death. Never leave the keys
in your vehicle with unsupervised
children, when the engine is running.
WARNING
We recommend that you use parts
for replacement from an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
If an aftermarket key is used, the
ignition switch may not return to
ON after START. If this happens,
the starter will continue to operate
causing damage to the starter
motor and possible fire due to
excessive current in the wiring.
Features of your vehicle
D010300CEN
Immobilizer system (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system to
reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle
use.
Your immobilizer system is comprised of
a small transponder in the ignition key
and electronic devices inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, whenever
you insert your ignition key into the ignition switch and turn it to ON, it checks
and determines and verifies if the ignition
key is valid or not.
If the key is determined to be valid, the
engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid, the
engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer system:
Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to the ON position.
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
The immobilizer system activates automatically. Without a valid ignition key for
your vehicle, the engine will not start.
WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
Immobilizer password is a customer unique password and should
be kept confidential. Do not leave
this number anywhere in your vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use the
key with other immobilizer keys around.
Otherwise the engine may not start or
may stop soon after it starts. Keep each
key separate in order to avoid a starting
malfunction.
CAUTION
Do not put metal accessories near
the ignition switch.
The engine may not start for the
metal accessories may interrupt the
transponder signal from normally
transmitting
✽ NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose your
keys, we recommend that you consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
The transponder in your ignition
key is an important part of the
immobilizer system. It is designed
to give years of trouble-free service,
however you should avoid exposure to moisture, static electricity
and rough handling. Immobilizer
system malfunction could occur.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
immobilizer system because it
could cause the immobilizer system to malfunction.We recommend
that the system be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifications to the immobilizer system
are not covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
4 3
Features of your vehicle
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
D020102APA
Unlock
All doors (and tailgate) are unlocked if
the lock/unlock button (1) is pressed
when both front doors are locked.
The hazard warning lights will blink twice
again to indicate that all doors (and tailgate) are unlocked.
After depressing this button, the doors
(and tailgate) will be locked automatically unless you open any door within 30
seconds.
OTQ047002
Remote keyless entry system
operations
D020101APA
Lock
All doors (and tailgate) are locked if the
lock/unlock button (1) is pressed when a
front door is unlocked.
If all doors (and tailgate) are closed, the
hazard warning lights blink once to indicate that all doors (and tailgate) are
locked.
However, if any door (or tailgate) remains
open, the hazard warning lights will not
operate. If all doors (and tailgate) are
closed after the lock button is pressed,
the hazard warning lights blink.
4 4
D020200CEN
Transmitter precautions
✽ NOTICE
The transmitter will not work if any of
following occur:
• The ignition key is in ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).
• The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door with
the ignition key. If you have a problem
with the transmitter, we recommend
that you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the transmitter is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone, the
signal from the transmitter could be
blocked by normal operation of your
cell phone or smart phone. This is
especially important when the phone
is active such as making call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or sending/
receiving emails. Avoid placing the
transmitter and your cell phone or
smart phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and maintain adequate
distance between the two devices.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due to
exposure to water or liquids, it will
not be covered by your manufacturer vehicle warranty.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to
changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it will
not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves to
the key surface.
OTQ047003G
D020300CTQ
Battery replacement
The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium battery which will normally last for several
years. When replacement is necessary,
use the following procedure.
1. Remove the screw (1) using a crosstip screwdriver.
2. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gently pry open the transmitter center
cover.
3. Remove the battery cover (2).
4. Replace the battery with a new one.
When replacing the battery, make sure
the battery position.
5. Install the battery in the reverse order
of removal.
• The keyless entry system transmitter is designed to give you
years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed to
moisture or static electricity.
If you are unsure how to use your
transmitter or replace the battery,
we recommend that you contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can
cause the transmitter to malfunction. Be sure to use the correct
battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmitter, don't drop it, get it wet, or
expose it to heat or sunlight.
• An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
4 5
Features of your vehicle
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
D030100ATQ
Armed stage
Armed
stage
Disarmed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
D030000AEN
This system is designed to provide protection from unauthorized entry into the
car. This system is operated in three
stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the
second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and
the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard warning
lights.
4 6
Park the car and stop the engine. Arm
the system as described below.
1. Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch and exit the vehicle.
2. Make sure that all doors (and tailgate)
and engine hood are closed and
latched.
3. Lock the doors using the transmitter of
the keyless entry system.
After completion of the steps above, the
hazard warning lights will blink once to
indicate that the system is armed.
If any door (or tailgate) or engine hood
remains open, the hazard warning lights
will not blink and the theft-alarm will not
arm. If all doors (and tailgate) and engine
hood are closed after the lock button is
pressed, the hazard warning lights blink
once.
✽ NOTICE
The theft-alarm system by the key can
be activated by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. If you want this feature, we recommend that you consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not arm the system until all passengers have left the vehicle. If the
system is armed while a passenger(s)
remains in the vehicle, the alarm may
be activated when the remaining passenger(s) leave the vehicle. If any
door (or tailgate) or engine hood is
opened within 30 seconds after the
system enters the armed stage, the
system is disarmed to prevent an
unnecessary alarm.
Features of your vehicle
D030200AEN-EE
D030400BTQ
Theft-alarm stage
Disarmed stage
The alarm will be activated if any of the
following occurs while the system is
armed.
• A front or rear door is opened without
using the transmitter.
• The tailgate is opened without using
the transmitter.
• The engine hood is opened.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously for
approximately 30 seconds. To turn off the
system, unlock the doors with the transmitter.
The system will be disarmed when the
doors (and tailgate) are unlocked with the
transmitter.
After depressing the unlock button, the
hazard warning lights will blink twice to
indicate that the system is disarmed.
After depressing the unlock button, if any
door (or tailgate) is not opened within 30
seconds, the system will be rearmed.
✽ NOTICE - Non-immobilizer
system
• Avoid trying to start the engine while
the alarm is activated. The vehicle
starting motor is disabled during the
theft-alarm stage.
If the system is not disarmed with the
transmitter, insert the key into the
ignition switch, turn the ignition
switch to the ON position and wait for
30 seconds. Then the system will be
disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, we recommend
that you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
✽ NOTICE - Immobilizer system
• If the system is not disarmed with the
transmitter, insert the key into the
ignition switch and start the engine.
Then the system will be disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, we recommend
that you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
theft-alarm system because it could
cause the theft-alarm system to
malfunction and we recommend
that you serviced an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifications to the theft-alarm system
are not covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
4 7
Features of your vehicle
DOOR LOCKS
Lock
Unlock
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter. (if
equipped)
• Once the doors are unlocked, they may
be opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
by hand. Make sure that doors are
closed securely.
Rear sliding doors
✽ NOTICE
OTQ047005
D050100CTQ
Operating door locks from outside the vehicle
• Turn the key toward the rear of the
vehicle to lock and toward the front of
the vehicle to unlock.
• If you lock/unlock the driver’s door with
a key, all vehicle doors will lock/unlock
automatically. (if equipped)
• If you lock the front passenger’s door
with a key all vehicle doors will lock
automatically. (if equipped)
4 8
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operating
temporarily in order to protect the
circuit and prevent damage to system
components.
WARNING
• If you do not close the
securely, the door may
again.
• Be careful that someone's
and hands are not trapped
closing the door.
door
open
body
when
OTQ047006
• Once the rear doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle and sliding the door towards
the rear of the vehicle.
• When the rear door is fully open, the
door will lock into an open position. To
close the door, pull out the door handle
and slide the door towards the front of
vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Front door
WARNING
Always remove the ignition key, engage
the parking brake, close all windows
and lock all doors when leaving your
vehicle unattended.
When the rear sliding door is not
fully open, it is not latched and may
move unintentionally. This could
result in a serious injury.
CAUTION
The left sliding door cannot be
opened when the fuel filler lid is
open. However, if the fuel filler lid is
opened after the door is opened
slightly, the left sliding door can be
slide rearward. Close the left sliding
door to prevent possible damage to
the door or the fuel filler lid.
OTQ047007
Rear sliding door
OTQ047008
• To lock a door without the key, push the
inside door lock button (1) or central
door lock switch (2) to the “Lock” position and close the door (3).
• If you lock the door with the central
door lock switch (2), all vehicle doors
will lock automatically. (if equipped)
4 9
Features of your vehicle
Front door
Unlock
Lock
OTQ047009
Rear sliding door
Unlock
Lock
OTQ047010
Operating door locks from inside
the vehicle
D050201ATQ
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The
red mark (2) on button will be visible.
4 10
• To lock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the “Lock” position. If the door
is locked properly, the red mark (2) on
the door lock button will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door handle
(3) outward.
• If the inner door handle of the driver’s
door is pulled when the door lock button is in lock position, the button is
unlocked and door opens. (if equipped)
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch and
any front door is open.
WARNING - Door lock malfunction
If a power door lock ever fails to
function while you are in the vehicle, try one or more of the following
techniques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from outside.
• Move to the cargo area and open
the tailgate. (if equipped)
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Doors
OTQ047011
D050202ATQ
With central door lock switch
(if equipped)
Operate by depressing the central door
lock switch.
• When pushing down on the portion (1)
of the switch, all vehicle doors will lock.
• When pushing down on the portion (2)
of the switch, all vehicle doors will
unlock.
• If the key is in the ignition switch and
any front door is open, the doors will
not lock when the portion (1) of central
door lock switch is pressed.
• The doors should always be fully
closed and locked while the vehicle is in motion to prevent accidental opening of the door.
Locked doors will also discourage potential intruders when the
vehicle stops or slows.
• Be careful when opening doors
and watch for vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles or pedestrians
approaching the vehicle in the
path of the door. Opening a door
when something is approaching
can cause damage or injury.
WARNING - Unlocked
vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked can
invite theft or possible harm to you
or others from someone hiding in
your vehicle while you are gone.
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
WARNING - Unattended
children
An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended children or animals who cannot escape
the vehicle. Furthermore, children
might operate features of the vehicle that could injure them, or they
could encounter other harm, possibly from someone gaining entry to
the vehicle. Never leave children or
animals unattended in your vehicle.
4 11
Features of your vehicle
D050300AUN
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the outside
door handle (1).
Even though the doors may be unlocked,
the rear door will not open by pulling the
inner door handle until the rear door child
safety lock is unlocked (
).
Impact sensing door unlock system (if equipped)
All doors will be automatically unlocked
when the impact is delivered to impact
sensors while the ignition switch ON.
However, the doors may not be unlocked
if mechanical problems occur with the
door lock system or battery.
WARNING - Rear door
locks
D050400AFD
Speed sensing door lock system
(if equipped)
When the speed of the vehicle keeps
above 40 km/h for 1 second, it will automatically lock all doors. For activation of
this fearture, we recommend that you
contact an athourized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽ NOTICE
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer can
select some auto door lock/unlock features as follows;
• Speed sensing auto door locking
• Auto door unlock when the ignition
key is removed from the ignition
switch
If you want to select a door lock/unlock
feature, we recommend that you consult
an athourized HYUNDAI dealer.
4 12
OTQ047012
D050500ATQ
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to help
prevent children from accidentally opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
The rear door safety locks should be
used whenever children are in the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Push the child safety lock located on
the front edge of the door to the lock
(
) position. When the child safety
lock is in the lock position, the rear
door will not open even though the
inner door handle is pulled.
If children accidentally open the
rear doors while the vehicle is in
motion, they could fall out and be
severely injured or killed. To prevent children from opening the rear
doors from the inside, the rear door
safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
TAILGATE
• The tailgate can also be locked and
unlocked with the key if the vehicle is
equipped with a key hole on the tailgate.
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened
by pressing the handle switch and
pulling the handle up. (Type A)
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened
by pulling the handle. (Type B)
Type A
OTQ047013
Type B
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock and
door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
WARNING
The tailgate swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when opening the tailgate.
OTQ047212
If your vehicle is equipped with twin
swing type tail gates, you may fully open
(if equipped) as follows ;
1. Open the tail gate.
2. Remove the pin from the bracket hole
and insert the pin into the pin hole.
3. Open the tail gate fully.
OTQ047013G
D070100ATQ
Opening the tailgate
• The tailgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or unlocked
with the key, transmitter or central door
lock switch. (if equipped)
CAUTION
Make certain that you close the tailgate before driving your vehicle.
Possible damage may occur to the
tailgate lift cylinders and attached
hardware if the tailgate is not
closed prior to driving.
4 13
Features of your vehicle
D070200AUN
CAUTION
Insert the pin into the bracket hole
before closing the tail gate. Or the
tail gate checker and/or vehicle
damage is possible and a dangerous situation may occur.
Closing the tailgate
To close the tailgate, lower and push
down the tailgate firmly. Make sure that
the tailgate is securely latched.
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
OTQ047213
4. After use, before closing the tail gate,
pull out the pin from the pin hole.
5. Align the checker arm hole and the tail
gate bracket hole, and insert the pin
into the bracket hole.
6. Close the tail gate.
4 14
If you drive with the tailgate open,
you will draw dangerous exhaust
fumes into your vehicle which can
cause serious injury or death to
vehicle occupants.
If you must drive with the tailgate
open, keep the air vents and all windows open so that additional outside air comes into the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Rear cargo
When someone is inadvertently locked in
the luggage compartment, if the lever is
pushed, the tailgate latch mechanism is
released and the tailgate is opened by
pushing rearward.
Type A
area
Occupants should never ride in the
rear cargo area where no restraints
are available. To avoid injury in the
event of an accident or sudden
stops, occupants should always be
properly restrained.
WARNING
OTQ047015
Type B
OTQ047015G
D070300AEN
Emergency tailgate safety release
(if equipped)
• For emergencies, be fully aware
of the location of the emergency
tailgate safety release lever in
this vehicle and how to open the
tailgate if you are accidentally
locked in the luggage compartment.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the luggage compartment
of the vehicle at any time. The
luggage compartment is a very
dangerous location in the event
of a crash.
• Use the release lever for emergencies only. Use extreme caution, especially while the vehicle
is in motion.
Your vehicle is equipped with the emergency tailgate safety release lever located on the bottom of the tailgate.
4 15
Features of your vehicle
WINDOWS
D080000ATQ
(1) Driver’s door power window switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power window switch
(3) Window opening and closing
(4) Automatic power window down
(Driver’s window, if equipped)
(5) Rear seat window (Type A)
(6) Rear seat window (Type B)
✽ NOTICE
Type A
In cold and wet climates, power windows
may not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
Type B
OTQ047016G
4 16
Features of your vehicle
D080100AUN
Power windows (if equipped)
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window switch
that controls the door's window. The driver has a power window lock switch which
can block the operation of passenger
windows. The power windows can be
operated for approximately 30 seconds
after the ignition key is removed or turned
to the ACC or LOCK position. However, if
the front doors are opened, the power
windows cannot be operated within the
30 second period after the ignition key
removal.
✽ NOTICE
While driving, if you notice buffeting
and pulsation (wind shock) with either
side window open, you should open the
opposite window slightly to reduce the
condition.
OTQ047203
OTQ047204
D080101ATQ
D080102ATQ
Type A
Type B
Window opening and closing
(if equipped)
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the windows in the vehicle.
To open or close a window, press down
or pull up the front portion of the corresponding switch to the first detent position (3).
Auto down window
(Driver’s window, if equipped)
Depressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent position (4) completely lowers the driver’s
window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is in
operation, pull up the switch momentarily
to the opposite direction of the window
movement.
4 17
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do not
open or close two windows or
more at the same time. This will
also ensure the longevity of the
fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and
the individual door window
switch in opposing directions at
the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
4 18
WARNING - Windows
• NEVER leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised children, when the engine is running.
• NEVER leave any child unattended in the vehicle. Even very
young children may inadvertently
cause the vehicle to move, entangle themselves in the windows,
or otherwise injure themselves or
others.
• Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head and
other obstructions are safely out
of the way before closing a window.
• Do not allow children to play with
the power windows. Serious
injury can result from unintentional window operation by the
child.
• Do not extend face or arms outside through the window opening
while driving.
OTQ047204E
D080103ATQ
Type C
Auto up/down window
(Driver’s window, if equipped)
Depressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second
detent position (4) completely lowers or
lifts the window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is in
operation, pull up or depress and release
the switch to the opposite direction of the
movement.
Features of your vehicle
If the power window is not operated correctly, the automatic power window system must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Close driver’s window and continue
pulling up on driver’s power window
switch for at least 1 second after the
window is completely closed.
Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the window is
blocked by an object or part of the body,
the window will detect the resistance and
will stop upward movement. The window
will then lower approximately 30 cm (11.8
in.) to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is pulled
up continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower approximately 2.5 cm (1 in.). And if the power
window switch is pulled up continuously
again within 5 seconds after the window
is lowered by the automatic window
reversal feature, the automatic window
reversal will not operate.
✽ NOTICE
The automatic reverse feature for the
driver’s window is only active when the
“auto up” feature is used by fully
pulling up the switch. The automatic
reverse feature will not operate if the
window is raised using the halfway position on the power window switch.
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage. If an
object less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in
diameter is caught between the
window glass and the upper window channel, the automatic reverse
window may not detect the resistance and will not stop and reverse
direction.
3FDA2015
D080200AFD
Manual windows (if equipped)
To raise or lower the window, turn the
window regulator handle clockwise or
counterclockwise.
WARNING
When opening or closing the windows, make sure your passenger's
arms, hands and body are safely
out of the way.
4 19
Features of your vehicle
OTQ047017
D080200ATQ
Rear seat window
(Type A, if equipped)
To open the window, move the window
while pressing the handle the direction of
the arrow.
OTQ047018
Rear seat window
(Type B, if equipped)
To open the windows, pull the rear portion of the latch out. Swing the latch forward and out, then lock it into the open
position by pushing outward until you
hear a click. To close the windows, pull
the handle inward. Then push the handle
rearward until you hear a click.
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, rear quarter
panel windows may not work properly
due to freezing conditions.
4 20
Features of your vehicle
HOOD
OTQ047019
D090100BUN
Opening the hood
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the
hood. The hood should pop open
slightly.
WARNING
Open the hood after turning off the
engine on a flat surface, shifting
the shift lever to the P(Park) position for automatic transmission and
to the 1st(First) gear or R(Reverse)
for manual transmission, and setting the parking brake.
OTQ047020
OTQ047021
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the
hood slightly, pull the secondary latch
(1) inside of the hood center and lift
the hood (2).
3. Pull the support rod from the hood.
4. Hold the hood open with the support
rod.
WARNING - Hot parts
Grasp the support rod in the area
wrapped in rubber. The rubber will
help prevent you from being burned
by hot metal when the engine is
hot.
4 21
Features of your vehicle
D090200AUN
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the following:
• All filler caps in engine compartment
must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Return the support rod to its clip to
prevent it from rattling.
3. Lower the hood until it is about 30 cm
(1 ft.) above the closed position and let
it drop. Make sure that it locks into
place.
4 22
WARNING - Hood
• Before closing the hood, ensure
that all obstructions are removed
from the hood opening. Closing
the hood with an obstruction
present in the hood opening may
result in property damage or
severe personal injury.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
WARNING
• Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could fly open
while the vehicle is being driven,
causing a total loss of visibility,
which might result in an accident.
• The support rod must be inserted
completely into the hole provided
in the hood whenever you inspect
the engine compartment. This will
prevent the hood from falling and
possibly injuring you.
• Do not move the vehicle with the
hood in the raised position, as
vision is obstructed and the hood
could fall or be damaged.
Features of your vehicle
FUEL FILLER LID
D100101ATQ
CAUTION
The left sliding door cannot be
opened when the fuel filler lid is
open. However, if the fuel filler lid is
opened after the door is opened
slightly, the left sliding door can be
slide rearward. Close the left sliding
door to prevent possible damage to
the door or the fuel filler lid.
OTQ047022
OTQ041023C
The fuel filler lid must be opened from
inside the vehicle by pushing the fuel
filler lid opener button located on the driver’s door.
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the fuel
filler lid opener button.
3. Pull the fuel filler lid (1) out to fully
open.
4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel tank
cap (2) counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
D100100AUN
Opening the fuel filler lid
✽ NOTICE
If the fuel filler lid will not open because
ice has formed around it, tap lightly or
push on the lid to break the ice and
release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If
necessary, spray around the lid with an
approved de-icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a
warm place and allow the ice to melt.
4 23
Features of your vehicle
D100200AEN
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until
it “clicks”. This indicates that the cap is
securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it lightly and make sure that it is securely
closed.
D100300BEN
WARNING - Refueling
• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and thus subject you to the risk
of fire and burns. Always remove
the fuel cap carefully and slowly.
If the cap is venting fuel or if you
hear a hissing sound, wait until
the condition stops before completely removing the cap.
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.
4 24
WARNING - Refueling dangers
Automotive fuels are flammable
materials. When refueling, please
note the following guidelines carefully. Failure to follow these guidelines may result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death by fire
or explosion.
• Read and follow all warning at the
gas station facility.
• Before refueling note the location
of the Emergency Gasoline ShutOff, if available, at the gas station
facility.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle,
you should eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity discharge by touching another metal
part of the vehicle, a safe distance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas source.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling
since you can generate static
electricity by touching, rubbing
or sliding against any item or fabric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)
capable of producing static electricity. Static electricity discharge
can ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must reenter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity discharge by touching a metal part
of the vehicle, away from the fuel
filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline source.
• When
using
an
approved
portable fuel container, be sure to
place the container on the
ground prior to refueling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling has
begun, contact with the vehicle
should be maintained until the
filling is complete.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
Use only approved portable plastic fuel containers designed to
carry and store gasoline.
• Do not use cellular phones while
refueling. Electric current and/or
electronic interference from cellular phones can potentially
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
• When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related to
the engine can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling is
complete, check to make sure the
filler cap and filler door are
securely closed, before starting
the engine.
• DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle while at
a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
• If a fire breaks out during refueling, leave the vicinity of the vehicle, and immediately contact the
manager of the gas station and
then contact the local fire department. Follow any safety instructions they provide.
CAUTION
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel requirements" suggested in section 1.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, please make sure
that you use parts designed for
replacement in your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can result
in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control
system. For more detailed information, we recommend that you
contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted surfaces
may damage the paint.
• After refueling, make sure the fuel
cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of
an accident.
OTQ047024G
D100500AUN
Emergency fuel filer lid release
If the fuel filler lid does not open using
the remote fuel filler lid release, you can
open it manually. Unsnap and remove the
panel in the cargo area. Pull the handle
outward slightly.
CAUTION
Do not pull the handle excessively,
otherwise the luggage area trim or
release handle may be damaged.
4 25
Features of your vehicle
STEERING WHEEL
D130100AEN
Power steering
Power steering uses energy from the
engine to assist you in steering the vehicle. If the engine is off or if the power
steering system becomes inoperative,
the vehicle may still be steered, but it will
require increased steering effort.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, we recommend that
the system be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Never hold the steering wheel
against a stop (extreme right or left
turn) for more than 5 seconds with
the engine running. Holding the
steering wheel for more than 5 seconds in either position may cause
damage to the power steering
pump.
4 26
✽ NOTICE
If the power steering drive belt breaks
or if the power steering pump malfunctions, the steering effort will greatly
increase.
✽ NOTICE
If the vehicle is parked for extended
periods outside in cold weather (below 10°C/14°F), the power steering may
require increased effort when the engine
is first started. This is caused by
increased fluid viscosity due to the cold
weather and does not indicate a malfunction.
When this happens, increase the engine
RPM by depressing accelerator until the
RPM reaches 1,500 rpm then release or
let the engine idle for two or three minutes to warm up the fluid.
D130300AUN
Tilt steering (if equipped)
Tilt steering allows you to adjust the
steering wheel before you drive. You can
also raise it to give your legs more room
when you exit and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be positioned
so that it is comfortable for you to drive,
while permitting you to see the instrument panel warning lights and gauges.
WARNING
• Never adjust the angle of the
steering wheel while driving. You
may lose steering control and
cause severe personal injury,
death or accidents.
• After adjusting, push the steering
wheel both up and down to be
certain it is locked in position.
Features of your vehicle
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
With the ignition switch in the ON position, pressing the heated steering wheel
button warms the steering wheel.
The indicator on the button will illuminate.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button once again. The indicator on the button will turn off.
✽ NOTICE
OTQ047035
To change the steering wheel angle, pull
down the lock-release lever (1), adjust
the steering wheel to the desired angle
(2), then pull up the lock-release lever to
lock the steering wheel in place. Be sure
to adjust the steering wheel to the
desired position before driving.
The heated steering wheel will turn off
automatically approximately 30 minutes
after the heated steering wheel is turned
on.
CAUTION
Do not install any grip to operate
the steering wheel. This causes
damage to the heated steering
wheel system.
OTQ047036
D130500AUN
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbol
on your steering wheel. Check the horn
regularly to be sure it operates properly.
✽ NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area indicated by the horn symbol on your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn
will operate only when this area is
pressed.
CAUTION
Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do
not press on the horn with a sharppointed object.
4 27
Features of your vehicle
MIRRORS
D140100BUN
D140102AUN
Inside rearview mirror
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automatically controls the glare from the headlights
of the car behind you in nighttime or low
light driving conditions. The sensor
mounted in the mirror senses the light
level around the vehicle, and automatically controls the headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
When the engine is running, the glare is
automatically controlled by the sensor
mounted in the rearview mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted into
reverse (R), the mirror will automatically
go to the brightest setting in order to
improve the drivers view behind the vehicle.
Adjust the rearview mirror to center on
the view through the rear window. Make
this adjustment before you start driving.
Night
WARNING - Rear visibility
Do not place objects in the rear
seat or cargo area which would
interfere with your vision through
the rear window.
Day
OTQ047037G
D140101AUN
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror and
do not install a wide mirror. It could
result in injury, during an accident
or deployment of the air bag.
4 28
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Make this adjustment before you start
driving and while the day/night lever is in
the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you during night driving.
Remember that you lose some rearview
clarity in the night position.
CAUTION
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Rearview mirrors
Indicator
1
Sensor
OTQ027002G
To operate the electric rearview mirror:
• Press the on/off button (1) to turn the
automatic dimming function on. The
mirror indicator light will illuminate.
Press the on/off button to turn the automatic dimming function off. The mirror
indicator light will turn off.
• The mirror defaults to the ON position
whenever the ignition switch is turned
on.
OTQ047038G
D140200AUN
• The right outside rearview mirror
is convex. In some countries, the
left outside rearview mirror is
also convex. Objects seen in the
mirror are closer than they
appear.
• Use your interior rearview mirror
or direct observation to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing
lanes.
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles before
driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both lefthand and right-hand outside rearview
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the remote switch. (if
equipped) The mirror heads can be folded back to prevent damage during an
automatic car wash or when passing in a
narrow street.
4 29
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface
of the glass. If ice should restrict
movement of the mirror, do not
force the mirror for adjustment. To
remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a
sponge or soft cloth with very warm
water.
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate while the switch is
depressed. Do not depress the
switch longer than necessary, the
motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirror by hand.
Doing so may damage the parts.
OTQ047042
CAUTION
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do
not adjust the mirror by force. Use
an approved spray de-icer (not radiator antifreeze) to release the
frozen mechanism or move the
vehicle to a warm place and allow
the ice to melt.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehicle
is moving. This could result in loss
of control, and an accident which
could cause death, serious injury
or property damage.
4 30
D140201AEN
Remote control (if equipped)
The electric remote control mirror switch
allows you to adjust the position of the
left and right outside rearview mirrors. To
adjust the position of either mirror, push
the switch (1) to R or L to select the right
side mirror or the left side mirror, then
press a corresponding point on the mirror
adjustment control to position the selected mirror up, down, left or right.
After adjustment, put the switch into neutral (center) position to prevent the inadvertent adjustment.
Features of your vehicle
OEN046215
D140202ATQ
Folding the outside rearview mirror
Manual type
To fold the outside rearview mirror, grasp
the housing of the mirror and then fold it
toward the rear of the vehicle.
OTQ047043
Electric Type (if equipped)
To fold the outside rearview mirror,
depress the button.
To unfold it, depress the button again.
CAUTION
• To prevent unnecessary battery
discharge, do not adjust the mirrors longer than necessary while
the engine is not running.
• In case of the electric type of outside rearview mirror, don’t fold it
by hand. It could cause the failure
of the motor.
4 31
Features of your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
■ Type A
1. Tachometer*
2. Turn signal indicators
■ Type B
3. Speedometer
4. Engine coolant temperature gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. Shift position indicator*
7. Odometer/Tripmeter
8. Fuel gauge
* : if equipped
■ Type C
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
OTQ044044L/OTQ044044F/OTQ044046k
4 32
Features of your vehicle
Instrument Cluster Control
Gauges
Left-Hand drive type
D150201AUN
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the forward
speed of the vehicle.
The speedometer is calibrated in miles
per hour and/or kilometers per hour.
WARNING
Never adjust the instrument cluster
while driving. This could result in
loss of control and lead to an accident that may cause death, serious
injury, or property damage.
OTQ047046
Right-Hand drive type
OTQ047046R
D150100AEN-EE
Adjusting Instrument Cluster
Illumination (if equipped)
When the vehicle’s parking lights or
headlights are on, rotate the illumination
control knob to adjust the instrument
panel illumination intensity.
4 33
Features of your vehicle
D150202AUN
D150203AUN
D150204BUN
Tachometer (if equipped)
The tachometer indicates the approximate number of engine revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct
shift points and to prevent lugging and/or
over-revving the engine.
When the door is open, or if the engine is
not started within 1 minute, the tachometer pointer may move slightly in ON position with the engine OFF. This movement
is normal and will not affect the accuracy
of the tachometer once the engine is running.
Engine temperature gauge
This gauge shows the temperature of the
engine coolant when the ignition switch
is ON.
Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank. The fuel tank capacity is given in
section 9. The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low fuel warning light, which will
illuminate when the fuel tank is near
empty.
On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel
warning light may come on earlier than
usual due to the movement of fuel in the
tank.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine damage.
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the
“H” or “130” position, it indicates
overheating that may damage the
engine.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The engine
coolant is under pressure and
could cause severe burns. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
WARNING - Fuel gauge
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain additional fuel as soon as possible after the
warning light comes on or when the
gauge indicator comes close to the
“E” or “0” level.
CAUTION
Avoid driving with a very low fuel
level. If you run out of fuel, it could
cause the engine to misfire and
result in excessive loading of the
catalytic converter.
4 34
Features of your vehicle
Left-Hand drive type
OTQ047047
OTQ047048
D150205AUN
Odometer/Tripmeter (if equipped)
Odometer (km or mi)
The odometer indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
You will also find the odometer useful to
determine when periodic maintenance
should be performed.
✽ NOTICE
It is forbidden that alteration of the
odometer of any vehicle with the intent
to change the mileage registered on the
odometer. The alteration may void your
warranty coverage.
OTQ047049
Right-Hand drive type
Tripmeter (km or mi)
TRIP A: Tripmeter A
TRIP B: Tripmeter B
The tripmeter indicates the distance of
individual trips selected by the driver.
OTQ047047R
Tripmeter A or B can be selected by
pressing the TRIP button for less than 1
second.
Tripmeter A or B can be reset to 0.0 by
pressing the TRIP button for 1 second or
more, and then releasing.
4 35
Features of your vehicle
All stored driving information (except
odometer) is reset if the battery is disconnected. The odometer is always displayed until the display is turned off.
Left-Hand drive type
Push the TRIP button for less than 1 second to select distance to empty, average
speed or tripmeter function as follows :
OTQ047047
Distance to empty
Right-Hand drive type
OTQ047052
Average speed
Tripmeter
OTQ047047R
D150206ATQ
Trip computer (if equipped)
The trip computer is a microcomputercontrolled driver information system that
displays information related to driving,
including distance to empty, tripmeter
and average speed on the display when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
4 36
Odometer
Distance to empty (km or miles)
This mode indicates the estimated distance to empty based on the current fuel
in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel
delivered to the engine. When the
remaining distance is below 50 km (30
miles), “---” will be displayed and the distance to empty indicator will blink.
The meter’s working range is from 50 to
999 km (30 to 999 miles).
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• If the vehicle is not on level ground or
the battery power has been interrupted, the “Distance to empty” function
may not operate correctly.
The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters (1.6
gallons) of fuel are added to the vehicle.
• The fuel consumption and distance to
empty values may vary significantly
based on driving conditions, driving
habits, and condition of the vehicle.
• The distance to empty value is an estimate of the available driving distance.
This value may differ from the actual
driving distance available.
Average speed
Tripmeter
Odometer
Odometer
OTQ047054
OTQ047051
Average speed (km/h or mph)
This mode calculates the average speed
of the vehicle since the last average
speed reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
average speed keeps going while the
engine is running.
The meter's working range is from 0 to
220 km/h (0 to 140 mph).
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second, when the average speed is
being displayed, clears the average
speed to zero (---).
Tripmeter (km or miles)
This mode indicates the distance of individual trip since the last tripmeter reset.
The meter's working range is from 0.0 to
999.9 km (miles).
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second when the tripmeter is being displayed clears the tripmeter to zero (0.0).
4 37
Features of your vehicle
D150300AEN
D150302AEN
D150303AEN
Warnings and indicators
Air bag warning light
(if equipped)
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS) warning light
(if equipped)
This light illuminates if the ignition switch
is turned ON and goes off in approximately 3 seconds if the system is operating normally.
If the ABS warning light remains on,
comes on while driving, or does not
come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, this indicates
that there may be a malfunction with the
ABS.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
The normal braking system will still be
operational, but without the assistance of
the anti-lock brake system.
All warning lights are checked by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). If any light that does not illuminate, we recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
After starting the engine, check to make
sure that all warning lights are off. If any
are still on, this indicates a situation that
needs attention. When releasing the
parking brake, the brake system warning
light should go off. The fuel warning light
will stay on if the fuel level is low.
4 38
This warning light will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON position. This light also comes on when the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is
not working properly. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not come on, or continuously remains on after operating for
about 6 seconds when you turned the
ignition switch to the ON position or started the engine, or if it comes on while
driving, we recommend that the system
be inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Features of your vehicle
Electronic brake force distribution (EBD)
system warning light
■ Type A
■ Type B
If two warning lights illuminate at the
same time while driving, your vehicle
may have a malfunction with the ABS
and EBD system.
In this case, your ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally. We recommend that the system be checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
If the both ABS and brake warning
lights are on and stay on, your vehicle’s brake system will not work
normally during sudden braking. In
this case, avoid high speed driving
and abrupt braking. We recommend
that the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
D150304AEN-EE
D150305AUN
Seat belt warning
Turn signal indicator
Seat belt warning light (if equipped)
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will blink for approximately
6 seconds each time you turn the ignition
switch ON regardless of belt fastening.
If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened after
the ignition switch is ON, the seat belt
warning light blinks again for approximately 6 seconds.
The blinking green arrows on the instrument panel show the direction indicated
by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on
but does not blink, blinks more rapidly
than normal, or does not illuminate at all,
a malfunction in the turn signal system is
indicated. Your dealer should be consulted for repairs.
Seat belt warning chime (if equipped)
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned ON or
if it is unfastened after the ignition switch
is ON, the seat belt warning chime will
sound for approximately 6 seconds. At
this time, if the seat belt is fastened, the
chime will stop at once.
D150306AUN
High beam indicator
This indicator illuminates when the headlights are on and in the high beam position or when the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
4 39
Features of your vehicle
D150307AEN
Engine oil pressure
warning light
This warning light indicates the engine oil
pressure is low.
If the warning light illuminates while driving:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
stop.
2. With the engine off, check the engine
oil level. If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available, we recommend that you call an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
If the engine is not stopped immediately after the engine oil pressure
warning light is illuminated, severe
damage could result.
4 40
CAUTION
If the oil pressure warning light
stays on while the engine is running, serious engine damage may
result. The oil pressure warning
light comes on whenever there is
insufficient oil pressure. In normal
operation, it should come on when
the ignition switch is turned on,
then go out when the engine is
started. If the oil pressure warning
light stays on while the engine is
running, there is a serious malfunction.
If this happens, stop the car as
soon as it is safe to do so, turn off
the engine and check the oil level. If
the oil level is low, fill the engine oil
to the proper level and start the
engine again. If the light stays on
with the engine running, turn the
engine off immediately. In any
instance where the oil light stays on
when the engine is running, we recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Engine oil level warning
light (Diesel engine,
if equipped)
When the engine oil is not enough, the
engine oil level warning light may be illuminated. If the warning light comes on,
check the engine oil level as soon as
possible and add engine oil as required.
Slowly pour the recommended the oil little by little into a funnel. (Oil refill capacity: approximately 0.6 ~ 1.0 L)
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to "Recommended lubricants and capacities" in section 9.) Do not overfill the
engine oil to ensure the oil level is not
above F mark on the dipstick.
✽ NOTICE
• Cycle the ignition from OFF to ON 3
times within 5 seconds, the warning
light will go off immediately.
However, when you turn off the warning light without adding the engine oil,
the light may come on again.
• If you drive the vehicle after adding
the engine oil, the warning light will
go off within 1hour.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• If the light comes on continuously after adding the engine oil and
driving the vehicle for 1 hour,we
recommend that the system be
checked by an nearest authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Even if this light does not come
on after the engine has started,
the engine oil should be checked
and supplied periodically.
Parking brake & brake fluid warning
light
■ Type A
■ Type B
Parking brake warning
This light is illuminated when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the START or ON position. The warning
light should go off when the parking
brake is released while engine is running.
The parking brake warning chime will
sound to remind you that the parking
brake is applied when you are driving
above 10 km/h (6 mph). Always release
the parking brake before you drive.
Low brake fluid level warning
If the warning light remains on, it may
indicate that the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
If the warning light remains on:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required. Then check all brake
components for fluid leaks.
3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are
found, the warning light remains on or
the brakes do not operate properly.
We recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diagonal braking systems. This means you still
have braking on two wheels even if one
of the dual systems should fail. With only
one of the dual systems working, more
than normal pedal travel and greater
pedal pressure are required to stop the
car. Also, the car will not stop in as short
a distance with only a portion of the
brake system working. If the brakes fail
while you are driving, shift to a lower gear
for additional engine braking and stop the
car as soon as it is safe to do so.
To check bulb operation, check whether
the parking brake and brake fluid warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle with a warning
light on is dangerous. If the brake
warning light remains on, we recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
4 41
Features of your vehicle
Low brake vacuum pressure warning
(diesel engine only, if equipped)
If the warning light remains on, it may
indicate that the brake vacuum pump has
any problem. Therefore you should avoid
high speed driving or sudden stop, and
you should depress the brake pedal
deeper and harder than usual in braking.
We recommend that the system be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
• Continuous braking while driving
on steep or long downhill may
cause to descend the vacuum
level in brake booster for a time
and turn on the warning light. In
this case, shift down the transmission. If the warning light illuminate continuously, stop the
vehicle in the safe location and
wait until the warning light goes
off.
• Driving the vehicle with a warning light on is dangerous. If the
brake warning light remains on,
we recommend that the system
be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
4 42
D150312AUN
Shift pattern indicator
(if equipped)
The indicator displays to show the automatic transmission shift lever selection.
Manual transmission shift
indicator (if equipped)
This indicator informs you which gear is
desired while driving to save fuel.
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd
gear is desired (currently the shift
lever is in the 2nd gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to the
3rd gear is desired (currently the
shift lever is in the 4th gear).
✽ NOTICE
When the system is not working properly, up/down arrow indicator and gear is
not displayed.
Automatic transmission
shift indicator
(if equipped, For Europe)
In the Sports Mode, this indicator informs
which gear is desired while driving to
save fuel.
• Shifting up : ▲2, ▲3, ▲4
• Shifting down : ▼1, ▼2, ▼3
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd
gear is desired (currently the shift
lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to the
3rd gear is desired (currently the
shift lever is in the 4th gear).
When the system is not working properly,
the indicator is not displayed.
Features of your vehicle
D150339ASA
O/D OFF Indicator
(if equipped)
O/D
OFF
This indicator comes on when the O/D
system is deactivated.
D150315AUN
D150317AFD
Tailgate open warning light
Immobilizer indicator
(if equipped)
This warning light blinks when the tailgate is not closed securely with the ignition in any position.
This light illuminates when the immobilizer key is inserted and turned to the ON
position to start the engine.
At this time, you can start the engine. The
light goes out after the engine is running.
If this light blinks when the ignition switch
is in the ON position before starting the
engine, we recommend that the system
be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
D150313AEN
Charging system warning
light
This warning light indicates a malfunction
of either the generator or electrical
charging system.
If the warning light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion:
1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2. With the engine off, check the generator drive belt for looseness or breakage.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a problem exists somewhere in the electrical
charging system. We recommend that
the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
D150316AUN
Door ajar warning light
This warning light illuminates when a
door is not closed securely with the ignition in any position.
4 43
Features of your vehicle
D150318ATQ
D150320ATQ
Low fuel level warning light
Malfunction indicator (MIL)
(check engine light)
CHECK
(if equipped)
This indicator light is part of the Engine
Control System which monitors various
emission control system components. If
this light illuminates while driving, it indicates that a potential malfunction has
been detected somewhere in the emission control system.
This light will also illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will go out in a few seconds
after the engine is started. If it illuminates
while driving, or does not illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, we recommend that the system
be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Generally, your vehicle will continue to be
drivable, but we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
This warning light indicates the fuel tank
is nearly empty. When it comes on, you
should add fuel as soon as possible.
Driving with the fuel level warning light on
or with the fuel level below “E” or “0” can
cause the engine to misfire and damage
the catalytic converter.
4 44
CAUTION
Prolonged
driving
with
the
Emission
Control
System
Malfunction Indicator Light illuminated may cause damage to the
emission control systems which
could effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
CAUTION - Gasoline engine
If the Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light illuminates, potential catalytic converter
damage is possible which could
result in loss of engine power.
We recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION - Diesel engine
(if equipped with DPF)
When the malfunction indicator
light is blinks, it may stop blinking
after driving the vehicle at more
than 60km/h (37 mph) or at more
than second gear with 1500 ~ 2000
engine rpm for a certain time (for
about 25 minutes).
If the malfunction indicator light
continues to be blinked in spite of
the procedure, we recommend that
the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If you continue to drive with the
malfunction indicator light blinking
for a long time, the DPF system can
be damaged and fuel consumption
can be worsen.
CAUTION - Diesel engine
If the Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light blinks,
some error related to the injection
quantity adjustment occurs which
could result in loss of engine power,
combustion noise and poor emission. We recommend that the system
be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
ESP (ESC) indicator (Electronic
Stability Program) (if equipped)
■ Type A
■ Type B
ESP
The ESP (ESC) indicator will illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned ON,
but should go off after approximately 3
seconds. When the ESP (ESC) is on, it
monitors the driving conditions. Under
normal driving conditions, the ESP
(ESC) indicator will remain off. When a
slippery or low traction condition is
encountered, the ESP (ESC) will operate, and the ESP (ESC) indicator will
blink to indicate the ESP (ESC) is operating.
But, if the ESP (ESC) system malfunctions the indicator illuminates and stays
on. We recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
✽ NOTICE
After reconnecting or recharging a discharged battery, the ESP (ESC) indicator may illuminate. In this case, turn the
steering wheel half way to the left and
right while the ignition switch is in the
ON position. Then, restart the engine
after the ignition is off. If the ESP (ESC)
indicator does not turn off, we recommend that the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
ESP (ESC) OFF indicator (if equipped)
■ Type A
■ Type B
ESP
OFF
The ESP (ESC) OFF indicator will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned
ON, but should go off after approximately 3 seconds. To switch to ESP (ESC)
OFF mode, press the ESP (ESC) OFF
button. The ESP (ESC) OFF indicator will
illuminate indicating the ESP (ESC) is
deactivated.
4 45
Features of your vehicle
D150328AEN
D150329AEN
D150330AEN
Glow indicator (Diesel
engine)
Fuel filter warning light
(Diesel engine)
Overspeed warning
(if equipped)
The indicator light illuminates when the
ignition switch is placed at the ON position. The engine can be started after the
preheat indicator light goes off. The illuminating time varies with the water temperature, air temperature and battery
condition.
This warning light illuminates for 3 seconds after the ignition switch is set to the
ON position and then it will go out. If it
lights up while the engine is running, it
indicates that water has accumulated
inside the fuel filter. If this happens,
remove the water from the fuel filter. For
more information, refer to “Fuel filter” in
section 7.
Overspeed warning light
If you drive with the speed of 120 km/h or
more, the overspeed warning light will
blink. This is to prevent you from driving
your vehicle with overspeed.
✽ NOTICE
If the engine was not started within 10
seconds after the preheating is completed, turn the ignition switch once more to
the LOCK position during 10 seconds,
and then to the ON position, in order to
preheat again.
CAUTION
If the preheat indicator light continues to illuminate or flash on and off
after the engine has warmed up or
while driving, we recommend that
the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
4 46
CAUTION
When the fuel filter warning light is
illuminated, engine power (vehicle
speed & idle speed) may decrease.
If you keep driving with the warning
light on, you can damage your vehicle's engine parts and injection system of the Common Rail. If this
occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
120
km/h
Overspeed warning chime
If you drive with the speed of 120 km/h or
more, the overspeed warning chime will
sound for about 5 seconds. This is to prevent you from driving your vehicle with
overspeed.
Features of your vehicle
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
D150327AUN
WARNING
Key reminder warning chime
(if equipped)
If the driver’s door is opened while the
ignition key is left in the ignition switch
(ACC or LOCK position), the key
reminder warning chime will sound. This
is to prevent you from locking your keys
in the vehicle. The chime sounds until the
key is removed from the ignition switch or
the driver’s door is closed.
The rear parking assist system is a
supplementary function only. The
operation of the rear parking assist
system can be affected by several
factors (including environmental
conditions). It is the responsibility
of the driver to always check the
area behind the vehicle before and
while backing up.
Sensors
OTQ047055
D170000AEN
The rear parking assist system assists
the driver during backward movement of
the vehicle by chiming if any object is
sensed within a distance of 120 cm (47
in.) behind the vehicle. This system is a
supplemental system and it is not intended to nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the back sensors are limited. Whenever backing-up, pay as much
attention to what is behind you as you
would in a vehicle without a rear parking
assist system.
4 47
Features of your vehicle
Operation of the rear parking
assist system
D170101AEN
Operating condition
• This system will activate when backing
up with the ignition switch ON.
If the vehicle is moving at a speed over
5 km/h (3 mph), the system may not be
activated correctly.
• The sensing distance while the rear
parking assist system is in operation is
approximately 120 cm (47 in.).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest
one will be recognized first.
D170102AUN
Types of warning sound
• When an object is 120 cm to 81 cm (47
in. to 32 in.) from the rear bumper:
Buzzer beeps intermittently.
• When an object is 80 cm to 41 cm (31
in. to 16 in.) from the rear bumper:
Buzzer beeps more frequently.
• When an object is within 40 cm (15 in.)
of the rear bumper:
Buzzer sounds continuously.
4 48
D170200AEN
Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system
The rear parking assist system may
not operate properly when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will
operate normally when the moisture
has been cleared.)
2. The sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or the
sensor cover is blocked. (It will operate
normally when the material is removed
or the sensor is no longer blocked.)
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradient).
4. Objects generating excessive noise
(vehicle horns, loud motorcycle
engines, or truck air brakes) are within
range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile phones
are within range of the sensor.
7. The sensor is covered with snow.
8. Trailer towing
The detecting range may decrease
when:
1. The sensor is stained with foreign matter such as snow or water. (The sensing range will return to normal when
removed.)
2. Outside air temperature is extremely
hot or cold.
The following objects may not be recognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,
chains or small poles.
2. Objects which tend to absorb the sensor frequency such as clothes, spongy
material or snow.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m
(40 in.) in height and narrower than 14
cm (6 in.) in diameter.
Features of your vehicle
D170300AEN
Rear parking assist system precautions
• The rear parking assist system may
not sound sequentially depending on
the speed and shapes of the objects
detected.
• The rear parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has been
modified or damaged. Any non-factory
installed equipment or accessories
may also interfere with the sensor performance.
• The sensor may not recognize objects
less than 40 cm (15 in.) from the sensor, or it may sense an incorrect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or stained
with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor
may be inoperative until the stains are
removed using a soft cloth.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
✽ NOTICE
This system can only sense objects within the range and location of the sensors;
It can not detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed. Also,
small or slim objects, such as poles or
objects located between sensors may not
be detected by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the vehicle when backing up.
Be sure to inform any drivers of the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the
system regarding the systems capabilities and limitations.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the vehicle is driven close to objects on the
road, particularly pedestrians, and
especially children. Be aware that
some objects may not be detected
by the sensors, due to the object’s
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effectiveness of
the sensor. Always perform a visual inspection to make sure the vehicle is clear of all obstructions
before moving the vehicle in any
direction.
D170400AEN
Self-diagnosis
If you don’t hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermittently when shifting the gear to the R
(Reverse) position, this may indicate a
malfunction in the rear parking assist system. If this occurs, we recommend that
the system be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occupants due to a rear parking assist
system malfunction. Always drive
safely and cautiously.
4 49
Features of your vehicle
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
LIGHTING
Left-Hand drive type
D190100CUN
Battery saver function
OTQ067001L
Right-Hand drive type
OTQ067001R
D180000AUN
The hazard warning flasher should be
used whenever you find it necessary to
stop the car in a hazardous location. When
you must make such an emergency stop,
always pull off the road as far as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned on by
pushing in the hazard switch. This causes
all turn signal lights to blink. The hazard
warning lights will operate even though the
key is not in the ignition switch.
To turn the hazard warning lights off, push
the switch a second time.
4 50
• The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when the
driver removes the ignition key and
opens the driver-side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights will
be turned off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed, perform the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON
again using the light switch on the
steering column.
CAUTION
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except driver’s door), the battery saver function does not operate. Therefore, it
causes the battery to be discharged. In this case, make sure to
turn off the lamp before getting out
of the vehicle.
OTQ049131
D190400ATQ
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and a
Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at the
end of the control lever to one of the following positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
Features of your vehicle
OTQ049301
OTQ049302
OTQ049303
D190401AEN
D190402AEN
D190500BUN
Parking light position (
)
When the light switch is in the parking
light position (1st position), the tail,
license and instrument panel lights are
ON.
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the headlight
position (2nd position) the head, tail,
license and instrument panel lights are
ON.
High beam operation
✽ NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it back
for low beams. The high beam indicator
will light when the headlight high beams
are switched on. To prevent the battery
from being discharged, do not leave the
lights on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.
WARNING
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles. Using high
beam could obstruct the other driver's vision.
4 51
Features of your vehicle
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the
turn signal bulbs may be burned out and
will require replacement.
✽ NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally quick
or slow, a bulb may be burned out or
have a poor electrical connection in the
circuit.
OTQ049304
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the normal
(low beam) position when released. The
headlight switch does not need to be on
to use this flashing feature.
4 52
OTQ049305
D190600AUN
Turn signals and lane change signals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on the
turn signals, move the lever up or down
(A). Green arrow indicators on the instrument panel indicate which turn signal is
operating.
They will self-cancel after a turn is completed. If the indicator continues to flash
after a turn, manually return the lever to
the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the turn
signal lever slightly and hold it in position
(B). The lever will return to the OFF position when released.
Features of your vehicle
Left-Hand drive type
CAUTION
Left-Hand drive type
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor.
OTQ047056
Right-Hand drive type
OTQ047132
Right-Hand drive type
OTQ047056R
OTQ047132R
D190700AEN
D190800AUN
Front fog light (if equipped)
Rear fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide improved
visibility when visibility is poor due to fog,
rain or snow, etc. The fog lights will turn
on when fog light switch is pressed after
the parklight is turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, press the switch
again.
To turn the rear fog lights on, turn the
headlight switch to the headlight on position and press the rear fog light switch
(light on switch will illuminate).
4 53
Features of your vehicle
The rear fog lights turn on when the rear
fog switch is pressed after the front fog
switch is turned to ON and the headlight
switch to the parklight position. (if
equipped)
To turn the rear fog lights off, press the
rear fog light switch again or turn the
headlight switch to the OFF position.
The higher the number of the switch
position, the lower the headlight beam
level. Always keep the headlight beam at
the proper leveling position, or headlights
may dazzle other road users.
Left-Hand drive type
D190900AUN
Daytime running light
(if equipped)
OTQ047133
Right-Hand drive type
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make
it easier for others to see the front of your
vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
and it is especially helpful after dawn and
before sunset.
The DRL system will make the headlights turn OFF when:
1. The parklight switch is ON.
2. Engine stops.
Loading condition
Van
Driver only
0
0
Driver + Front passenger
0
0
1
-
1
-
2
1
3
1
+ 4th row passenger
OTQ047133R
Switch position
Wagon
Driver + Front passenger
Full passengers
Headlight leveling device
(if equipped)
(including driver)
D191001ATQ
driver) + Maximum per-
Manual type
To adjust the headlight beam level
according to the number of the passengers and the loading weight in the luggage area, turn the beam leveling switch.
4 54
Listed below are the examples of proper
switch settings. For loading conditions
other than those listed below, adjust the
switch position so that the beam level
may be the nearest as the condition
obtained according to the list.
Full passengers (including
missible loading
Driver + Maximum permissible loading
Features of your vehicle
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Type A
Type B
Type C
D200100CTQ
Windshield wipers
Type D
Operates as follows when the ignition
switch is turned ON.
/ MIST: For a single wiping cycle,
push the lever upward and
release it with the lever in the
OFF (0) position. The wipers
will operate continuously if
the lever is pushed upward
and held.
OFF (0) : Wiper is not in operation
INT (---) : Wiper operates intermittently
at the same wiping intervals.
Use this mode in a light rain or
mist. To vary the speed setting,
turn the speed control knob.
LO (1) : Normal wiper speed
HI (2) : Fast wiper speed
OTQ048902L/OTQ048902/OTQ049902L/OTQ049902
A : Wiper speed control
·
/ MIST – Single wipe
· OFF (0) – Off
· INT (---) – Intermittent wipe
(if equipped)
· LO (1) – Low wiper speed
· HI (2) – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent wipe time adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes (if equipped)
4 55
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windshield, defrost the
windshield for about 10 minutes, or
until the snow and/or ice is removed
before using the windshield wipers to
ensure proper operation.
If you do not remove the snow and/or ice
before using the wiper and washer, it
may damage the wiper and washer system.
✽ NOTICE
• When you operate the wipers, if your
vehicle has a problem in any part of
the wiper operation system, the wiper
may operate in the LO mode regardless of the wiper switch position.
In this case, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• When the ignition key is removed, the
wiper blade sometimes may move to
properly position slightly for reducing
the deterioration of the windshield
wipers.
4 56
D200200AUN
Windshield washers
In the OFF (0) position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer fluid
on the windshield and to run the wipers
1-3 cycles.
Use this function when the windshield is
dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check the
washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not
sufficient, you will need to add appropriate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid
to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the
passenger side.
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage to the
washer pump, do not operate the
washer when the fluid reservoir is
empty.
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freezing
temperatures without first warming
the windshield with the defrosters;
the washer solution could freeze on
contact with the windshield and
obscure your vision.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers or windshield, do not
operate the wipers when the
windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers and washer system,
use anti-freezing washer fluids in
the winter season or cold weather.
Features of your vehicle
Type C
Type A
D200300ATQ
Rear Window Wiper and Washer
(if equipped)
Turn the switch to desired position to
operate the rear wiper and washer.
- Wash with brief wipes
ON (
) - Normal wiper operation
OFF (0) - Wiper is not in operation
- Spraying washer fluid and wiping
Type D
Type B
✽ NOTICE
Do not operate the washer continuously
for more than 15 seconds or when the
fluid reservoir is empty; this could damage the system. Do not operate the wiper
when the window is dry; this can result
in scratching as well as premature wiper
blade wear. For the same reason, do not
operate the washer when the washer
fluid reservoir is empty.
OTQ048909L/OTQ048909/OTQ049909L/OTQ049909
D : Rear wiper/washer control (if equipped)
·
– Spraying washer fluid
· ON (
) – Continuous wipe
· OFF (0) – Off
·
– Wash with brief wipes
4 57
Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR LIGHT
D210000BEN
Type A
CAUTION
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine
is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
WARNING
Do not use the interior lights when
driving in the dark. Accidents could
happen because the view may be
obscured by interior lights.
OTQ047060
Type B
OTQ047060G
D210100ATQ
Map lamp (if equipped)
•
4 58
: Push the switch to turn the
map lamp on or off. This light
produces a spot beam for convenient use as a map lamp at
night or as a personal lamp for
the driver and the front passenger.
• DOOR : In the DOOR position, the light
comes on when any door is
opened regardless of the ignition switch position. When
doors are unlocked by the
transmitter, the light comes on
for approximately 30 seconds
as long as any door is not
open. The light goes out gradually after approximately 30
seconds if the door is closed.
However, if the ignition switch
is ON or all doors are locked,
the light will turn off immediately.
If a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ACC or
LOCK position, the light stays
on for about 20 minutes.
However, if a door is opened
with the ignition switch in the
ON position, the light stays on
continuously.
• ROOM : In the ROOM position, the light
stays on at all times.
Features of your vehicle
➀
Type A
OTQ047062
Type B
OTQ047061
: Push the switch to turn the
map lamp on or off. This light
produces a spot beam for
convenient use as a map
lamp at night or as a personal lamp for the rear passenger.
➁ DOOR : In the DOOR position, the
light comes on when any
/
door is opened regardless of
the ignition switch position.
➂ ROOM : In the ROOM position, the
/
light stays on at all times.
D210200ATQ
Room lamp (Rear, if equipped)
•
CAUTION
: Push the switch to turn the
rear room lamp on or off.
OTQ047206
Do not leave the switch in this position for an extended period of time
when the vehicle is not running.
Type C
OTQ047201
4 59
Features of your vehicle
DEFROSTER (IF EQUIPPED)
➃ MOOD : Push the switch to turn the
mood lamp on when the
room lamp is off. Once the
mood lamp is on, each time
you press the button the color
of the light will change. The
mood lamp will turn off when
the button is pressed again
after the last color or when
the mood lamp button is
pressed for approximately 4
seconds or when the ROOM,
DOOR or DIMMER button is
pressed.
➄ DIMMER : Whenever you push this
button when the room lamp
is turned on, the brightness
of the room lamp will
change within 3 level.
4 60
D220000AUN
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside surface of
the rear window, never use sharp
instruments or window cleaners
containing abrasives to clean the
window.
✽ NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to “Windshield
defrosting and defogging” in this section.
OTQ047064
D220100AUN
Rear window defroster (if equipped)
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from the
rear window, while the engine is running.
To activate the rear window defroster,
press the rear window defroster button
located in the center facia switch panel.
The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when the
defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of snow on
the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 20 minutes
or when the ignition switch is turned off. (if
equipped) To turn off the defroster, press
the rear window defroster button again.
Features of your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
■ Front climate control
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Air conditioning button*
3. Temperature control knob
4. Mode selection knob
5. Rear fan speed control knob/
Rear climate control selection knob*
6. Rear temperature control button*
7. Rear window defroster button
8. Air intake control button
9. Rear fan speed control knob*
■ Rear climate control (if equipped)
10. Rear temperature control* and mode
selection knob*
* : if equipped
CAUTION
Operating the blower when the ignition switch is in the ON position
could cause the battery to discharge. Operate the blower when
the engine is running.
OTQ047066/OTQ047067
D230000BTQ
4 61
Features of your vehicle
D230100ATQ
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system (if equipped)
on.
OTQ047069L
4 62
Features of your vehicle
Bi-Level (B, D, C, F)
Air flow is directed towards the face and
the floor.
Floor-Level (C, F, A, D)
OTQ047068
D230101ATQ
Mode selection
The mode selection knob controls the
direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield.
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air being
directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, F, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters.
OTQ047071
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the horizontal thumbwheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to
the maximum position. To open the vent,
rotate it right to the desired position.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Defrost-Level (A)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
4 63
Features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the
button illuminates when the
recirculated air position is
selected.
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compartment will be drawn through
the heating system and
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
OTQ047072
OTQ047073
D230102AUN
D230103AUN
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows you
to control the temperature of the air flowing from the ventilation system. To
change the air temperature in the passenger compartment, turn the knob to
the right position for warm and hot air or
left position for cooler air.
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
4 64
Outside (fresh) air position
The indicator light on the
button will not illuminate
when the outside (fresh) air
position is selected.
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air enters
the vehicle from outside and
is heated or cooled according to the function selected.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fogging of the windshield and side windows
and the air within the passenger compartment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry
air in the passenger compartment.
WARNING
• Continued climate control system
operation in the recirculated air
position may allow humidity to
increase inside the vehicle which
may fog the glass and obscure
visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating system
on. It may cause serious harm or
death due to a drop in the oxygen
level and/or body temperature.
• Continued climate control system
operation in the recirculated air
position can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, and loss of vehicle
control. Set the air intake control
to the outside (fresh) air position
as much as possible while driving.
OTQ047074
D230104AUN
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows you to
control the fan speed of the air flowing
from the ventilation system. To change
the fan speed, turn the knob to the right
for higher speed or left for lower speed.
Setting the fan speed control knob to the
0 position turns off the fan.
OTQ044400
To turn off the blowers
To turn off the blowers, turn the fan
speed control knob to the "0" position.
4 65
Features of your vehicle
However, the front climate control system
should be operated together for rear air
conditioning;
1. Set the front fan speed to the desired
position.
2. Push the air conditioning button.
3. Set the rear temperature, fan speed
and mode to the desired position.
OTQ047075
OTQ047076
D230105AUN
D230200ATQ
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Push the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate). Push the button again to turn the
air conditioning system off.
Rear heating and air conditioning
(if equipped)
4 66
The temperature, fan speed and mode of
the rear climate control system can be
controlled independently regardless of
the front climate control system operation.
Turn the rear climate control selection
knob to the “R” and set the rear temperature, fan speed and mode to the desired
position.
Features of your vehicle
The rear mode is selected automatically
by selecting the rear temperature control.
•
: Rear air blows from the upper
vents on the rear side ceiling.
•
: Rear air blows from the upper
vents on the rear side ceiling and
the lower vents on the floor.
•
: Rear air blows from the lower
vents on the floor.
In the front seat
OTQ047078
In the rear seat
OTQ047077
Rear vents
The vent can be adjusted by rotating the
thumb wheel.
✽ NOTICE
If all the vents are closed, it may cause
some noise. Always open 2 vents or
more.
OTQ047079
D230202ATQ
Rear temperature control
To change the air temperature in the rear
passenger compartment, turn the knob
to the right for warm and hot air or left for
cooler air.
4 67
Features of your vehicle
System operation
In the front seat
D230501AUN
OTQ047095
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
In the rear seat
D230502AUN
OTQ047080
D230203ATQ
Rear fan speed control
To change the fan speed, turn the knob
to the right for higher speed or left for
lower speed.
To turn off the fan, turn the knob to the 0
position.
4 68
Heating
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode
or
position.
to the
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from
entering the car through the ventilation
system, temporarily set the air intake
control to the recirculated air position.
Be sure to return the control to the
fresh air position when the irritation
has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just ahead
of the windshield. Care should be
taken that these are not blocked by
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position and fan speed to the
desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.
Features of your vehicle
D230503BFD
Air conditioning (if equipped)
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with environmentally friendly
R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the
position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside
air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum
comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired, set
the temperature control to the extreme
left position, then set the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
✽ NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning system, monitor the temperature gauge
closely while driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating. Continue to use the blower
fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in humid
weather air conditioning may create
water droplets inside the vehicle.
Since excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical equipment,
air conditioning should only be run
with the windows closed.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of the
windows on rainy or humid days,
decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning
system.
• During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to ensure
maximum system performance.
4 69
Features of your vehicle
• When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position provides
maximum cooling, however, continual
operation in this mode may cause the
air inside the vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and humid air
intake. This is a normal system operation characteristics.
4 70
D230504ATQ
Fuel-fired Heater (If Equipped)
This fuel-fired heater supplies additional
heat to the interior compartment with a
low fuel consumption to compensate the
heat provided by engine alone.
The following 3 conditions should be
meet at the same time for automatic
operation of the fuel-fired heater.
• Engine runs.
• Ambient temperature is lower than 5°C.
• Coolant temperature is lower than
68°C.
A cleaning process of the fuel-fired
heater will be performed automatically
when the heater is not operated due to
increase of coolant temperature and ignition off.
During cleaning process, supplied fuel in
the heater will be burnt completely and
any smoke will be expelled. It is a necessary process for next operation and durability of the heater and takes about 1~3
minutes.
✽ NOTICE
• The following symptoms will occur
and it is normal.
- A white smoke may come out from
the fuel-fired heater exhaust pipe
during operation of the heater.
However, when an excessive black
smoke is discharged, the fuel-fired
heater should be inspected.
- A “buk-buk” noise from the heater is
a noise to form flame for combustion.
- When the heater is operated at full
load, a “Wooing” noise occurs.
- When shutting off the engine during
heater operation, a “Wing” noise
occurs to perform the cleaning
process.
• When refueling, stop operation of the
fuel-fired heater by shutting off the
engine.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Blower
Climate control
air filter
Heater core
Evaporator
core
1LDA5047
D230300AFD
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating
and air conditioning system. If dust or
other pollutants accumulate in the filter
over a period of time, the air flow from the
air vents may decrease, resulting in
moisture accumulation on the inside of
the windshield even when the outside
(fresh) air position is selected. If this happens, we recommend that the climate
control air filter be replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty or rough
roads, more frequent air conditioner
filter inspections and changes are
required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
D230400AEN
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a negative
impact on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, we recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
✽ NOTICE
It is important when servicing the air
conditioning system that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrigerant is
used. Otherwise, damage to the compressor and abnormal system operation
may occur.
WARNING
Improper service may cause serious injury to the person performing
the service. For more detailed information, we recommend that you
contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
4 71
Features of your vehicle
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
D250000AEN
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the
or
position
during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of
the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up,
causing loss of visibility. In this
case, set the mode selection knob
or button to the
position and
fan speed control knob or button to
the lower speed.
• For maximum defrosting, set the temperature control to the extreme right/hot
position and the fan speed control to the
highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired while
defrosting or defogging, set the mode to
the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice
from the windshield, rear window, outside
rear view mirrors, and all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the hood and
air inlet in the cowl grill to improve heater
and defroster efficiency and to reduce the
probability of fogging up the inside of the
windshield.
4 72
OTQ047100
Manual climate control system
D250101ATQ
To defog inside windshield
1. Select any fan speed except “0” position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the
or
position.
4. If the
position is selected, the outside (fresh) air and air conditioning will
be selected automatically.
If the air conditioning and outside (fresh)
air position are not selected automatically, press the corresponding button manually.
OTQ047101
D250102AFD
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot
position.
3. Select the
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning will be selected automatically.
Features of your vehicle
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
D250300ATQ
D270000AUN
Defogging logic (if equipped)
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the driver
or passengers.
To reduce the possibility of fogging up
the inside of the windshield, the air intake
or air conditioning are controlled automatically according to certain conditions
such as
position. To cancel or return
the defogging logic, do the following.
CAUTION
OTQ047104
D250301AUN
Manual climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Turn the mode selection knob to the
defrost position (
).
3. Push the air intake control button at
least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The indicator light in the air intake control
button will blink 3 times with 0.5 second
of interval. It indicates that the defogging
logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
• Always keep the storage compartment covers closed while
driving. Do not attempt to place
so many items in the storage
compartment that the storage
compartment cover cannot close
securely.
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other flammable/explosive materials in the vehicle. These items may catch fire
and/or explode if the vehicle is
exposed to hot temperatures for
extended periods.
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic
status.
4 73
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
OTQ047107
OTQ047108
D270200BUN
D270300BUN
Glove box
Sunglass holder (if equipped)
To open the glove box, pull the handle
and the glove box will automatically
open. Close the glove box after use.
To open the sunglass holder, press the
cover and the holder will slowly open.
Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with the lenses facing out.
Push to close.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
CAUTION
Do not keep food in the glove box
for a long time.
4 74
• Do not keep objects except sunglasses inside the sunglass holder. Such objects can be thrown
from the holder in the event of a
sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in
the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass holder
while the vehicle is moving. The
rear view mirror of the vehicle
can be blocked by an open sunglass holder.
• Do not put the glasses forcibly
into a sunglass holder to prevent
breakage or deformation of
glasses. It may cause personal
injury if you try to open it forcibly
when the glasses are jammed in
holder.
Features of your vehicle
For improving the effectiveness of the
cool box, do as follows;
1. Set the temperature to the cold
(extreme left) position for cool air.
Turn on the air conditioning system for
cooler air.
2. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
3. Set the mode to the face (
) position.
OTQ047109
OTQ047081
D270400ATQ
D230600ATQ
Multi box (if equipped)
Cool box (if equipped)
To open the cover, pull the handle down.
Close the cover after use.
You can keep beverage cans or other
items cool using the open/close lever of
the vent installed in the multi box.
1. Turn on the fan and set the temperature control to the desired position.
2. Set the mode control to the face (
)
or bi-level (
) position.
3. Turn the open/close lever of the vent
installed in the multi box to the open
position.
4. When the cool box is not used, turn
the lever to its closed position.
✽ NOTICE
If some items in the cool box block the
vent, the cooling effectiveness of the cool
box is reduced.
WARNING
Do not put the perishable food in
the cool box because it may not be
able to maintain the necessary consistent temperature to keep the
food fresh.
4 75
Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR FEATURES
Front
WARNING
OTQ047110
• Do not hold the lighter in after it
is already heated because it will
overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it to
prevent overheating.
• Do not insert foreign objects into
the socket of the cigarette lighter.
It may damage the cigarette
lighter.
OTQ047111
Rear (if equipped)
D280100BEN
Cigarette lighter
For the cigarette lighter to work, the ignition switch must be in the ACC position
or the ON position.
To open the cover, press the cover and it
will slowly open.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the
way into its socket. When the element
has heated, the lighter will pop out to the
“ready” position.
CAUTION
We recommend that you use parts
for replacement from an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
The use of plug-in accessories
(shavers, hand-held vacuums, and
coffee pots, etc.) may damage the
socket or cause electrical failure.
1VQA2187
D280200ATQ
Ashtray
WARNING - Ashtray use
• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays
as waste receptacles.
• Putting lit cigarettes or matches in
an ashtray with other combustible
materials may cause a fire.
4 76
Features of your vehicle
Front
To open the cover, press the cover and it
will slowly open. To clean the ashtray, the
plastic receptacle should be removed by
lifting the plastic ash receptacle upward
and pulling it out.
Rear (if equipped)
To use the ashtray, open the cover.
To remove the ashtray to empty or clean,
pull it up and out.
Front
WARNING - Hot liquids
OTQ047112
Center seat
• Do not place uncovered cups of
hot liquid in the cup holder while
the vehicle is in motion. If the hot
liquid spills, you burn yourself.
Such a burn to the driver could
lead to loss of control of the vehicle.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden stop
or collision, do not place uncovered or unsecured bottles, glasses, cans, etc., in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
OTQ047113
Rear
Keep cans or bottles out of direct
sun light and do not put them in a
vehicle that is heated up. It may
explode.
(if equipped)
OTQ047114
D280300BTQ
Cup holder
4 77
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
lamp (if equipped)
When putting the drinking water on
the front or the center seat cup
holder, the liquid may flow into the
external input terminal(if equipped)
by sudden braking, so be sure to
close the lid of the drinking water.
Front
To open the cover, press the knob on the
cover and it will slowly open.
Place a cup or small beverage can after
pulling out the blade (1).
Center seat/Rear (if equipped)
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
4 78
Close the vanity mirror cover
securely and return the sunvisor to
its original position after use. If the
vanity mirror is not closed securely,
the lamp will stay on and could
result in battery discharge and possible sunvisor damage.
* : if equipped
OTQ047115
D280400BTQ
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull
it downward, unsnap it from the bracket
(1) and swing it to the side (2).
To use the vanity mirror (if equipped), pull
down the visor and slide the mirror cover
(3).
Adjust the sunvisor forward or backward
(4, if equipped).
The ticket holder (5) is provided for holding a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)
WARNING
For your safety, do not obstruct your
vision when using the sunvisor.
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
Do not put a finger or a foreign element (pin, etc.) into a power outlet
and do not touch with a wet hand.
You may get an electric shock.
OTQ047116
D280500AEN
Power outlet (if equipped)
The power outlet is designed to provide
power for mobile telephones or other
devices designed to operate with vehicle
electrical systems. The devices should
draw less than 10 amps with the engine
running.
CAUTION
• Use the power outlet only when
the engine is running and remove
the accessory plug after use.
Using the accessory plug for prolonged periods of time with the
engine off could cause the battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A in electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices may
cause excessive audio static and
malfunctions in other electronic
systems or devices used in your
vehicle.
4 79
Features of your vehicle
D280601AUN
D280604AEN
Hour (1)
Pressing the H button with your finger, a
pencil or similar object will advance the
time displayed by one hour.
Display conversion (if equipped)
To change the 12 hour format to the 24
hour format, press the R button until the
display blinks.
For example, if the R button is pressed
while the time is 10:15 p.m., the display
will be changed to 22:15.
D280602AUN
Minute (2)
Pressing the M button with your finger, a
pencil or similar object will advance the
time displayed by one minute.
OTQ047119
D280600AEN
Digital clock (if equipped)
WARNING
Do not adjust the clock while driving. You may lose your steering
control and cause an accident that
results in severe personal injury or
death.
Whenever the battery terminals or related fuses are disconnected, you must
reset the time.
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position, the clock buttons operate as
follows:
4 80
D280603AUN
Reset (3)
To clear away minutes, press the R button with your finger, a pencil or similar
object. Then the clock will be set precisely on the hour.
For example, if the R button is pressed
while the time is between 9:01 and 9:29,
the display will be reset to 9:00.
9:01 ~ 9:29 display changed to 9:00
9:30 ~ 9:59 display changed to 10:00
Features of your vehicle
Type A
Type B
WARNING
OXM049228
OTQ047122
Type C
D280800BEN
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
CAUTION
Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
WARNING
Do not hang other objects except
clothes. In an accident it may cause
vehicle damage or personal injury.
OCM039200N
D280900BTQ
Floor mat anchor(s) (if equipped)
When using a floor mat on the front floor
carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor
mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps
the floor mat from sliding forward.
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat to
the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle’s
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to the
vehicle’s floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of
one another (e.g. all-weather rubber mat on top of a carpeted floor
mat). Only a single floor mat
should be installed in each position.
IMPORTANT – Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver’s side
floor mat anchors that are
designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal operation,
HYUNDAI recommends that the
HYUNDAI floor mat designed for
use in your vehicle be installed.
4 81
Features of your vehicle
AUDIO SYSTEM
✽ NOTICE
CAUTION
• If you install an aftermarket HID
head lamp, your vehicle’s audio and
electronic device may malfunction.
• Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner
and air freshener from contacting the
interior parts because they may cause
damage or discoloration.
OHM048154L
Antenna
D300102ATQ
Roof antenna (if equipped)
Your car uses a roof antenna to receive
both AM and FM broadcast signals. This
antenna is a removable type. To remove
the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To
install the antenna, turn it clockwise.
4 82
• Before entering a place with a low
height clearance or a car wash,
remove surely the antenna by
rotating it counterclockwise. If
not, the antenna may be damaged.
• When reinstalling your antenna, it
is important that it is fully tightened. But it could be removed
when parking the vehicle or when
loading cargo on the roof rack.
• When cargo is loaded on the roof
rack, do not place the cargo near
the antenna pole to ensure proper
reception.
Features of your vehicle
D300204AHM
VOLUME (VOL +/-) (1)
• Press the lever upward (+) to increase
the volume.
• Press the lever downward (-) to
decrease the volume.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed
for less than 0.8 second, it will work as
follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION
buttons.
D300203AHM
OTQ047124
D300200ATQ
Steering wheel audio control
(if equipped)
The steering wheel audio remote control
button is installed to promote safe driving.
CAUTION
Do not operate audio remote control buttons simultaneously.
SEEK/PRESET (
/
) (2)
The SEEK/PRESET button has different
functions based on the system mode. For
the following functions the button should
be pressed for 0.8 seconds or more.
CD/USB/ iPod mode
It will function as TRACK UP/DOWN button.
D300202AEN
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK select
button.
MODE (3)
Press the button to change audio source.
FM (1~2) ➟ AM ➟ CD ➟ USB/AUX (iPod)
➟ FM...
CD/USB/ iPod mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
D300205AHM
MUTE (4)
Press the button to mute the sound.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons are described in the following
pages in this section.
4 83
Features of your vehicle
FM reception
OTQ040211
JBM001
D300600AHM-EE
D300800AEN
AUX, USB and iPod® port
(if equipped)
How car audio works
If your vehicle has an aux and/or USB
(universal serial bus) port or iPod port,
you can use an aux port to connect audio
devices and an USB port to plug in an
USB and also an iPod port to plug in an
iPod.
✽ NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise may
occur during playback. If this happens,
use the power source of the portable
audio device.
❋ iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
4 84
AM(MW, LW) reception
AM (MW, LW) and FM radio signals are
broadcast from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your car. This
signal is then received by the radio and
sent to your car speakers.
When a strong radio signal has reached
your vehicle, the precise engineering of
your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction. However, in
some cases the signal coming to your
vehicle may not be strong and clear. This
can be due to factors such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of
other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large
obstructions in the area.
JBM002
AM (MW, LW) broadcasts can be
received at greater distances than FM
broadcasts. This is because AM (MW,
LW) radio waves are transmitted at low
frequencies. These long, low frequency
radio waves can follow the curvature of
the earth rather than travelling straight
out into the atmosphere. In addition, they
curve around obstructions so that they
can provide better signal coverage.
Features of your vehicle
FM radio station
JBM003
JBM004
JBM005
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high
frequencies and do not bend to follow the
earth's surface. Because of this, FM
broadcasts generally begin to fade at
short distances from the station. Also,
FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains, or other obstructions.
These can result in certain listening conditions which might lead you to believe a
problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not
indicate radio trouble:
• Fading - As your car moves away from
the radio station, the signal will weaken
and sound will begin to fade. When this
occurs, we suggest that you select
another stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can disturb the
signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level
may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may
begin to play. This is because your
radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals
being received from several directions
can cause distortion or fluttering. This
can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by
signals from two stations with close
frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition has
passed.
4 85
Features of your vehicle
Using a cellular phone or a two-way
radio
When a cellular phone is used inside the
vehicle, noise may be produced from the
audio equipment. This does not mean
that something is wrong with the audio
equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far as possible
from the audio equipment.
CAUTION
When using a communication system such a cellular phone or a radio
set inside the vehicle, a separate
external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely affect safe operation of the vehicle.
WARNING
Don't use a cellular phone when
you are driving. You should stop at
a safe place to use a cellular phone.
4 86
Care of disc (if equipped)
• If the temperature inside the car is too
high, open the car windows for ventilation before using your car audio.
• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA/
AAC/WAVE files without permission.
Use CDs that are created only by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents such as
benzene and thinner, normal cleaners
and magnetic sprays made for analogue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from getting damaged. Hold and carry CDs by
the edges or the edges of the center
hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece of
soft cloth before playback (wipe it from
the center to the outside edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or paper
onto it.
• Make sure on undesirable matter other
than CDs are inserted into the CD
player (Do not insert more than one
CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
• Depending on the type of CD-R/CDRW CDs, certain CDs may not operate
normally according to manufacturing
companies or making and recording
methods. In such circumstances, if you
still continue to use those CDs, they
may cause the malfunction of your car
audio system.
✽ NOTICE - Playing an
Incompatible Copy-Protected
Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do not
comply with the international audio CD
standards (Red Book), may not play on
your car audio. Please note that if you
try to play copy protected CDs and the
CD player does not perform correctly
the CDs maybe defective, not the CD
player.
Features of your vehicle
STEREO RADIO PLAYER OPERATION (M420) (IF EQUIPPED)
1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME Control Knob
2. BAND Select Button
3. TUNE/MODE Select Knob
4. AUTO SEEK Select Button
5. Best Station Memory (BSM) Button
6. PRESET Station Select Buttons
TQ420
4 87
Features of your vehicle
1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob
2. BAND Select Button
The radio unit may be operated when the
ignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. Press the knob to switch the power
on. The LCD shows the radio frequency
in the radio mode or the tape direction
indicator in the tape mode. To switch the
power off, press the knob again.
Pressing the AM/FM button changes
VOLUME Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
the volume and counterclockwise to
reduce the volume.
AVC(Auto Volume Control) Feature
As the car runs faster, its running noise
also becomes louder.
To compensate this noise, this unit implements AVC feature that increases car
audio’s volume level automatically when
the car runs faster.
the AM(MW, LW), FM1 and FM2 bands.
3. TUNE/MODE Select Knob
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
the frequency and counterclockwise to
reduce the frequency.
Mode Select Knob
Pressing the MODE knob changes the
BASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and
BALANCE mode.
The mode selected is shown on the display.
After selecting the each mode, rotate the
mode select knob clockwise or counterclockwise.
BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
MIDDLE Control
To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MIDDLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
4 88
TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
FADER Control
Rotate the control knob clockwise to
emphasize the rear speaker sound (front
speaker sound will be attenuated). When
the control knob is turned counterclockwise, the front speaker sound will be
emphasized (rear speaker sound will be
attenuated).
✽ NOTICE
For the VAN type car, FADER control
feature is not supported(no rear speaker
equipped).
BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
the right speaker sound (left speaker
sound will be attenuated). When the control knob is turned counterclockwise, the
left speaker sound will be emphasized
(right speaker sound will be attenuated).
Features of your vehicle
4. AUTO SEEK Select Button
(Automatic Channel Selection)
Press the AUTO SEEK select button.
When the
side is pressed, the unit
will automatically tune to the next higher
frequency and when the
side is
pressed, it will automatically tune to the
next lower frequency.
5. Best Station Memory (BSM)
Button
When the BSM button is pressed, the six
channels from the highest field intensity
are selected next and stored in memory.
The stations selected are stored in the
sequence of frequency from the first preset key.
6. PRESET STATION Select
Buttons
Six stations for AM(MW, LW), FM1 and
FM2 respectively can be preset in the
electronic memory circuit.
HOW TO PRESET STATIONS
Six AM(MW, LW) and twelve FM stations
may be programmed into the memory of
the radio. Then, by simply pressing the
AM(MW, LW) / FM select button and/or
one of the six station select buttons, you
may recall any of these stations instantly.
To program the stations, follow these
steps:
• Press AM(MW, LW)/FM selector to set
the band for AM(MW, LW), FM1 and
FM2.
• Select the desired station to be stored
by seek or manual tuning.
• Determine the preset station select
button you wish to use to access that
station.
• Press the station select button for more
than two seconds. A select button indicator will show in the display indicating
which select button you have
depressed. The frequency display will
flash after it has been stored into the
memory. You should then release the
button, and proceed to program the
next desired station. A total of 24 stations can be programmed by selecting
one AM(MW, LW) and two FM station
per button.
• When completed, any preset station
may be recalled by selecting AM(MW,
LW), FM1 or FM2 band and the appropriate station button.
CAUTION
• Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. The audio system mechanism may be damaged
if you spill them.
• Do not strike or allow anything to
impact the audio system, damage
to the system mechanisms could
occur.
4 89
Features of your vehicle
CASSETTE TAPE PLYER OPERATION (M420) (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Tape Program/AUX Button
2. Tape Eject Button
3. DOLBY Button
4. REPEAT (RPT) Button
5. AUTO MUSIC Search (AMS) Button
6. FF/REW Button
TQ420
4 90
Features of your vehicle
1. TAPE PROGRAM/AUX Button
This allows you to play the reverse side
of the tape by merely pressing the program button. The PLAY and an arrow will
appear in the display to show the tape
direction.
• If you press this button more than 0.8
second. you can change to AUX mode.
• AUX mode is available only when AUX
jack is plugged in and will change back
to the last mode if you pull it out.
2. TAPE EJECT Button
• When the button is pressed with a
cassette loaded, the cassette will eject.
• When the button is pressed during
FF/REW mode, the cassette will eject.
3. DOLBY Button
If you get background noise during tape
PLAY, you can reduce this considerably
by merely pressing the DOLBY button. If
you want to cancel the DOLBY feature,
press the button again.
4. REPEAT (RPT) Button
• To repeat the track you are currently
listening to, press the RPT button. To
cancel , press again.
• If you do not release RPT operation
when the track ends, it will automatically be replayed.
This process will continue until you
push the button again.
5. AUTO MUSIC Search (AMS)
Button
Press the button to find the starting point
of each song in a prerecorded music
tape. The quiet space between songs
(must have at least a 4 sec. gap) can be
identified by the AUTO MUSIC Search
button.
• Pressing the
will play the beginning of the next music segment.
• Pressing the
will start replay at the
beginning of the music just listened to.
• To stop FF or REW action, press the
button again.
6. FF/REW Button
• Fast forward tape winding starts when
the FF button is pressed during PLAY
or REW mode.
• PLAY starts when the FF button is
pressed again during FF mode.
• Tape rewinding starts when the
REW button is pressed during PLAY or
FF mode.
• PLAY starts when the REW button
pressed again during REW mode.
CAUTION
• Do not insert anything like coins
into the player slot as damage to
the unit may occur.
• Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. The playback
mechanism may be damaged if
you spill them.
• Do not strike or allow anything to
impact the audio system, damage
to the system mechanisms could
occur.
• When no device is connected to
the AUX cable, please pull out the
cable from the JACK on the car.
(AUX MODE is operational and
noise may heard in the AUX
MODE.)
✽ NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise may
occur during playback. If this happens,
use the orignal power source of the
portable audio device(e.g., batteries).
4 91
Features of your vehicle
STEREO RADIO PLAYER OPERATION (M445MP3) (IF EQUIPPED)
1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME Control Knob
2. BAND Select Button
3. TUNE/AUDIO Control Knob
4. AUTO SEEK Select Button
5. Best Station Memory (BSM) Button
6. EQ Button
7. PRESET Station Select Buttons
8. AUDIO Mode Select
TQ445MP3
4 92
Features of your vehicle
1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob
3. TUNE/AUDIO Control Knob
The radio unit may be operated when the
ignition key is in the "ACC" or “ON” position. Press the knob to switch the power
on. The LCD shows the radio frequency
in the radio mode, the tape direction indicator in the tape mode or CD track in
either the CD mode or CD AUTO
CHANGER mode. To switch the power
off, press the knob again.
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
the frequency and counterclockwise to
reduce the frequency.
AUDIO Control Knob
Pressing the AUDIO Mode select button
changes the BASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE,
FADER and BALANCE mode. The mode
selected is shown on the display.
VOLUME Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
the volume and counterclockwise to
reduce the volume.
BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
AVC(Auto Volume Control) Feature
As the car runs faster, its running noise
also becomes louder.
To compensate this noise, this unit implements AVC feature that increases car
audio’s volume level automatically when
the car runs faster.
MIDDLE Control
To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MIDDLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
2. BAND Select Button
Pressing the FM/AM button changes the
AM(MW, LW), FM1 and FM2 bands. The
mode selected is shown on the display.
TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
FADER Control
Rotate the control knob clockwise to
emphasize the rear speaker sound (front
speaker sound will be attenuated). When
the control knob is turned counterclockwise, the front speaker sound will be
emphasized (rear speaker sound will be
attenuated).
✽ NOTICE
For the VAN type car, FADER Control
feature is not supported(no rear speaker
equipped).
BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
the right speaker sound (left speaker
sound will be attenuated). When the control knob is turned counterclockwise, the
left speaker sound will be emphasized
(right speaker sound will be attenuated).
4. AUTO SEEK Select Button
(Automatic Channel Selection)
Press the AUTO SEEK select button.
When the
side is pressed, the unit will
automatically tune to the next higher frequency and when the
side is pressed,
it will automatically tune to the next lower
frequency.
4 93
Features of your vehicle
5. Best Station Memory (BSM)
Button
When the BSM button is pressed, the six
channels from the highest field intensity
are selected next and stored in memory.
The stations selected are stored in the
sequence frequency from the first preset
key.
6. EQ Button
Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC, POP, ROCK, JAZZ and OFF MODE
for the desired tone quality. Each press of
the button changes the display as follows;
CLASSIC➟POP➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟DEFEAT
7. PRESET STATION Select
Buttons
Six stations for AM(MW, LW), FM1 and
FM2 respectively can be preset in the
electronic memory circuit.
4 94
HOW TO PRESET STATIONS
Six AM(MW, LW) and twelve FM stations
may be programmed into the memory of
the radio. Then, by simply pressing the
AM(MW, LW) / FM select button and/or
one of the six station select buttons, you
may recall any of these stations instantly.
To program the stations, follow these
steps:
• Press AM(MW, LW)/FM selector to set
the band for AM(MW, LW), FM1 and
FM2.
• Select the desired station to be stored
by seek or manual tuning.
• Determine the preset station select
button you wish to use to access that
station.
• Press the station select button for more
than two seconds. A select button indicator will show in the display indicating
which select button you have
depressed. The frequency display will
flash after it has been stored into the
memory. You should then release the
button, and proceed to program the
next desired station. A total of 24 stations can be programmed by selecting
one AM(MW, LW) and two FM station
per button.
• When completed, any preset station
may be recalled by selecting AM(MW,
LW), FM1 or FM2 band and the appropriate station button.
8. AUDIO Mode select Button
Pressing the AUDIO Mode select button
changes the BASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE,
FADER and BALANCE mode. The mode
selected is shown on the display.
After selecting the each mode, rotate the
TUNE knob clockwise or counterclockwise.
CAUTION
• Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. The audio system mechanism may be damaged
if you spill them.
• Do not strike or allow anything to
impact the audio system, damage
to the system mechanisms could
occur.
Features of your vehicle
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (M445MP3) (IF EQUIPPED)
1. CD/AUX Select Button
2. CD EJECT Button
3. TRACK UP/DOWN Button
4. FF/REW Button
5. EQ (Equalizer) Button
6. CD SCAN Button
7. MARK (Bookmark) Button
8. RPT (Repeat) Button
9. RDM (Random) Button
10. FILE SEARCH Knob (TUNE Select Knob)
11. FLDR (Folder Search) Button
TQ445MP3
4 95
Features of your vehicle
1. CD/AUX Select Button
✽ NOTICE
4. FF/REW Button
• Insert the CD with the label facing
upward.
• Insert the CD to start CD playback,
during radio operation.
• When a disc is in the CD deck, if you
press the CD button the CD player will
begin playing even if the radio player is
being used.
• The CD player can be used when the
ignition switch is in either the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
• Push the CD button to start CD playback without pushing Power ON-OFF
control knob. (Only when a CD is in the
deck.)
• If you press this button you can change
to AUX mode.
• AUX mode is available only when AUX
jack is plugged in and change back to
last mode if you pull it out.
• Do not stick paper or tape etc., on the
label side or the recording side of any
discs, as it may cause a malfunction.
• The unit cannot play a CDR(Recordable
CD)
and
CDRW(Rewritable CD) that is not finalized. Please refer to the manual of CDR/CD-RW recoder or CD-R/CD-RW
software for more information on
finalization process.
• Depending on the recording status,
some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not be
played on this unit.
If you want to fast forward or reverse
through the compact disc track, push and
hold the FF or REW button.
When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.
2. CD EJECT Button
• When the EJECT button is pressed
with a CD loaded, the CD will eject.
• To eject all of the discs, press this button for one second or more.
4 96
3. TRACK UP/DOWN Button
• The desired track on the disc currently
being played can be selected using the
track number.
• Press
button once to skip forward to
the beginning of the next track.
Press
within a second after playback begins to quickly move backward
through a CD.
If you press
after more than a second, it will take you to the beginning of
the track you are now listening to.
5. EQ (Equalizer) Button
Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC, POP, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT
MODE for the desired tone quality. Each
press of the button changes the display
as follows;
CLASSIC➟POP➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟DEFEAT
6. CD SCAN Button
• Press the CD SCAN button to playback
the first 10 seconds of each track.
• Press the CD SCAN button again within 10 sec. when you have reached the
desired track.
• To playback the first 10 seconds of
each track in the selected folder, Press
the CD SCAN button within a second.
(MP3 CD only)
Features of your vehicle
7. MARK (Bookmark) Button
8. RPT (Repeat) Button
When the CD player unit is operating, the
desired track on the disc can be bookmarked by using the MARK button.
• Press the MARK button for more than
one second to bookmark the desired
track. "M" will be displayed on the LCD
and "MEMORY NO." will display for
approximately five seconds with a
beep sound. To play the bookmarked
tracks, press the MARK button within
one second and select the bookmarked track to play.
• To erase a bookmarked track, press
the MARK button for more than one
second. This will erase the bookmark
with a beep sound.
• To repeat the track you are currently
listening to, press the RPT button. To
cancel, press it again. If it is pressed
for more than one second, it will repeat
all tracks within the currently played
CD.
• To repeat the music within currently
played folder, press the RPT button for
more than one second. Then it will
repeat in sequential order within the
currently played folder. To cancel,
press it again. (MP3 CD only)
• If you do not release RPT operation
when the track ends, it will automatically be replayed. This process will
continue until you push the button
again.
If you want to delete all tracks stored on
Mark Memory, press FILE SEARCH
knob in the Mark Play mode for more
than one second. You will hear a beep
sound and all tracks will be deleted from
Mark Memory with "MARK DELETE
ALL" displayed on the LCD.
✽ NOTICE
Tracks stored on Mark Memory will be
automatically erased after you eject CDs
that contain those tracks.
9. RDM (Random) Button
• To listen to the music in random order,
press the RDM Button with a beep
sound for more than one second. To
cancel, press it again.
• To listen to the music within the currently played folder in random order,
press the RDM Button within one second.
To cancel, press it again within one
second. If it is pressed for more than
one second, it will be played in random
order within currently played CD (MP3
CD only).
10. FILE SEARCH Knob (TUNE
Select Knob)
• You can move through the track by
turning the FILE SEARCH knob clockwise or counterclockwise.
• After moving through the desired file,
press the FILE SEARCH knob to playback in the selected file.
• If you do not press the FILE SEARCH
knob within five seconds, the file
searching function will be released.
11. FLDR (FOLDER Search)
Button
• You can move through the folder by
pushing the FLDR button to up ( )
and down ( ).
• After moving the desired folder, press
the FILE SEARCH knob to play back in
the selected folder. If you do not press
the FILE SEARCH knob within 5 seconds, the folder searching function will
be released. It is not operated in a single folder.
4 97
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• When using a portable audio device
connected to power outlet, noise may
occur during playback.
If this happens, use the original power
source of the portable audio device
(e.g., batteries).
• To assure proper operation of the unit,
keep the vehicle interior temperature
within a normal range by using the
vehicle’s air conditioning or heating
system.
• When replacing the fuse, replace it
with a fuse having the correct capacity.
• All stored bookmarks are all erased
when the car battery is disconnected
or power to the vehicle is lost. If this
occurs, the bookmarks will have to be
reset.
• Do not add any oil to the rotating
parts. Keep magnets, screwdrivers
and other metallic objects away from
the tape mechanism and head.
4 98
CAUTION
• Do not insert warped or poor
quality discs into the CD player
as damage to the unit may occur.
• Do not insert anything like coins
into the player slot as damage to
the unit may occur.
• Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. The playback
mechanism may be damaged if
you spill them.
• Do not strike or allow anything to
impact the audio system, damage
to the system mechanisms could
occur.
• Off-road or rough surface driving
may cause the compact disc to
skip. Do not use the compact disc
when driving in such conditions
as damage to the compact disc
face could occur.
• Do not attempt to grab or pull the
compact disc out while the disc is
being pulled into the audio unit
by the self-loading mechanism.
Damage to the audio unit and
compact disc could occur.
• This equipment is designed to be
used only in a 12 volt DC battery
system with negative ground.
• This unit is made of precision
parts. Do not attempt to disassemble or adjust any parts.
• When driving your vehicle, be
sure to keep the volume of the
unit set low enough to allow you
to hear sounds coming from the
outside.
• Do not expose this equipment
(including the speakers and tape)
to water or excessive moisture.
• Avoid using recorded compact
discs in your audio unit. Original
compact discs are recommended.
• The unit is not sure of playing CDRW (Rewritable).
• When using the EQ function, turn
off the EQ function of the device
on the AUX input.
• When no device is connected to
the AUX cable, please pull out the
cable from the JACK on the car.
(AUX MODE is operational and
noise may heard in the AUX
MODE.)
Features of your vehicle
RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME, AUDIO CONTROL
■ PA710 (GENERAL)
1. Power ON/OFF Button & Volume Control
Knob
2. FM Button
3. AM Button
4. SEEK Button
5. Preset Button
6. AST (AUTO STORE) Button
■ PA710R (EUROPE)
7. TUNE & Audio Control Button
8. TA Button
9. PTY (FLDR) Button
10. FM/AM Button
TQ_PA710_RADIO / TQ_PA710R_RADIO
4 99
Features of your vehicle
Using RADIO, SETUP, VOLUME
and AUDIO CONTROL
1. Power ON/OFF Button & Volume
Control Button
Turns on/off the set when the IGNITION
SWITCH is on ACC or ON. If the button
is turned to the right, it increases the volume and left,decreases the volume.
• Press this button to turn the audio system ON or OFF. (EUROPE MODEL
ONLY)
• Depending on the model if the ignition
switch is not on ACC or ON position.
The “Battery Discharge” warning
appears on LCD after 10 seconds of
power-up, and automatically turns off
after 1 hours of operation.
• Adjusts the volume of the car audio
system. Rotate clockwise to increase
the volume or counterclockwise to
decrease.
2. FM Button
Turns to FM mode and toggles FM1and
FM2 when the button is pressed each
time.
4 100
3. AM Button
6. AST (AUTO STORE) Button
Pressing the [AM] button selects the AM
band. AM Mode is displayed on the LCD.
When the button is pressed, it automatically selects and saves channels with
high reception rate to PRESET buttons
[1]~[6] and plays the channel saved in
PRESET1. If no channel is saved after
AST, it will play the previous channel.
4. SEEK Button
• When the [SEEK
] button is
pressed, it increases the band frequency to automatically select a channel. Stops at the previous frequency if
no channel is found.
• When the [TRACK
] button is pressed, it reduces the band frequency to
automatically select a channel. Stops
at the previous frequency if no channel
is found.
5. Preset Button
Push [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 second to play the channel saved in each
button. Push Preset button for 0.8 second or longer to save current channel to
the respective button with a beep.
7. TUNE & Audio Control Button
Manual Channel Selection knob
Turn this control while listening to a radio
channel to manually adjust frequency.
Turn clockwise to increase frequency
and counterclockwise to reduce frequency.
SETUP Button
• GENERAL MODEL
Press this button to turn to the SCROLL
adjustment mode. If no action is taken for
5 seconds after pressing the button, it will
return to the play mode. (After entering
SETUP mode, PUSH functions of the
[TUNE] button to adjust SCROLL.)
Features of your vehicle
• EUROPE MODEL
Press this button to turn to the RDS
option, SCROLL adjustment mode. If no
action is taken for 5 seconds after pressing the button, it will return to the play
mode.
(After entering SETUP mode, move
between items using the left, right and
PUSH functions of the [TUNE] button.)
The setup item changes from SCROLL
➟ SDVC ➟ RDS ➟ RETURN ➟ AUDIO
➟ P.Bass
Sound Quality Control Knob
Pressing the button changes the AUDIO
mode. The mode selected is shown on
the display. After selecting each mode,
rotate the Audio control knob clockwise
or counterclockwise.
• BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
• MIDDLE Control
To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MIDDLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
• TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
• FADER Control
Turn the control knob clockwise to
emphasize rear speaker sound (front
speaker sound will be attenuated). When
the control knob is turned counterclockwise, front speaker sound will be emphasized (rear speaker sound will be attenuated).
9. PTY (FLDR) Button
• Moves [FLDR
] button when searching PTY in RDS Broadcasting Program
Type selection.
• Moves [PTY
] button when searching PTY in RDS Broadcasting Program
Type selection.
10. FM/AM Button
Turns to FM or AM mode, and toggles in
the order of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ FMA ➟ AM ➟
AMA ➟ FM1... when the button is
pressed each time.
• BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated). When the control
knob is turned counter clockwise, left
speaker sound will be emphasized (right
speaker sound will be attenuated).
8. TA Button
In FM, CD, AUX mode, turns on/off the
reception of TA channels of RDS.
4 101
Features of your vehicle
CDP, AUX
■ PA710 (GENERAL)
1. CD Slot
2. CD Eject Button
3. CD/AUX Button
4. TRACK Button
5. Fast Button
6. RANDOM Button
7. REPEAT Button
8. CD Indicator
■ PA710R (EUROPE)
9. SCAN Button
10. INFO Button
11. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button
12. PTY (FLDR) Button
TQ_PA710_CD / TQ_PA710R_CD
4 102
Features of your vehicle
Using CD Player
1. CD Slot
Insert CD with printed side upward and
gently push in. When the ignition switch
is on ACC or ON and power is off, power
is automatically turned on if the CD is
loaded. This CDP supports only 12cm
CD. If a VCD, Data CD are loaded,
"Reading Error" message will appear
and CD will be ejected.
4. TRACK Button
7. REPEAT Button
• Push [TRACK
] button for less than
0.8 second to play from the beginning
of current song.
• Push [TRACK
] button for less than
0.8 second and press again within
1 seconds to play the previous song.
• Push [SEEK
] button for less than
0.8 second to play the next song.
Press this button for less than 0.8 second
to activate ‘RPT’ mode and more than 0.8
second to activate ‘FLD RPT’ mode.
• RPT : Only a track(file) is repeatedly
played back.
• FLD RPT (MP3/WMA Only) : Only files
in a folder are repeatedly played back.
8. CD Indicator
5. Fast Button
Push
button for less than 0.8 second
to eject the CD during CD playback.
This button is enabled when ignition
switch is off.
• Push [FF] button for 0.8 second or
longer to initiate high speed sound
search of current song.
• Push [REW] button for 0.8 second or
longer to initiate reverse direction high
speed sound search of current song.
3. CD/AUX Button
6. RANDOM Button
If the auxiliary device is connected, it
switches to the AUX mode from the other
mode to play the sound from the auxiliary
player. If the CD is loaded, turns to CD
mode, and if a device is connected to
AUX then it toggles. CD ➟ AUX ➟ CD...
when the button is pressed each time. (It
will not turn to AUX if the auxiliary device
is not connected)
If no CD and auxiliary device is not connected, it displays "No Media" for 3 seconds and returns to the previous mode.
Press this button for less than 0.8 second
to activate ‘RDM’ mode and more than
0.8 second to activate ‘ALL RDM’ mode.
• RDM : Only files/tracks in a folder/disc
are played back in a random
sequence.
• ALL RDM (MP3/WMA Only) : All files in
a disc are played back in the random
sequence.
2. CD Eject Button
When the ignition switch is in ACC or ON
and if the CD is loaded, this indicator is
lighted. If the CD is ejected the icon is
turned off.
9. SCAN Button
Plays first 10 seconds of each song in
the DISC. To cancel the mode, press the
button once again.
4 103
Features of your vehicle
10. INFO Button
12. PTY (FLDR) Button
Displays the information of the current
CD TRACK (FILE) as below when the
button is pressed each time.
• Moves [FLDR
] button child folder of
the current folder and displays the first
song in the folder. Press TUNE/ENTER
knob to move to the folder displayed. It
will play the first song in the folder.
• Moves [PTY
], [FLDR
] button
parent folder and displays the first
song in the folder.
Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to
the folder displayed.
• CDDA : DISC TITLE ➟ DISC ARTIST
➟ TRACK TITLE ➟ TRACK ARTIST ➟
TOTAL TRACK ➟ DISC TITLE...
• MP3/WMA : FILE NAME ➟ TITLE ➟
ARTIST ➟ ALBUM ➟ FOLDER NAME
➟ TOTAL FILE ➟ FILE NAME... (not
displayed if the information is not available on the DISC.)
11. SEARCH Knob & ENTER
Button
Turn this button clockwise to display the
songs next to the currently played song.
Turn the button counterclockwise to display the songs before the currently
played song. Press the button to skip and
play the selected song.
4 104
Features of your vehicle
USB
■ PA710 (GENERAL)
1. USB Button
2. TRACK Button
3. RANDOM Button
4. REPEAT Button
5. INFO Button
6. PTY (FLDR) Button
7. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button
■ PA710R (EUROPE)
8. SCAN Button
9. Fast Button
TQ_PA710_USB / TQ_PA710R_USB
4 105
Features of your vehicle
Using USB device
3. RANDOM Button
6. PTY (FLDR) Button
If USB is connected, it switches to the
USB mode from the other mode to play
the song files stored in the USB.
If no CD and auxiliary device is not connected, it displays “No Media” for 3 seconds and returns to the previous mode.
Press this button for less than 0.8 second
to activate ‘RDM’ mode and more than
0.8 second to activate ‘ALL RDM’ mode.
• RDM : Only files in a folder are played
back in a random sequence.
• ALLRDM : All files in a USB memory
are played back in the random
sequence.
2. TRACK Button
4. REPEAT Button
• Press the [TRACK
] button for less
than 0.8 second to play from the beginning of the song currently played.
Press the button for less than 0.8 second and press it again within 1 seconds to move and play the previous
track.
• Press the [SEEK
] button for less
than 0.8 second to move to the next
track.
Press this button for less than 0.8 second
to activate ‘RPT’ mode and more than 0.8
second to activate ‘FLD RPT’ mode.
• RPT : Only a file is repeatedly played
back.
• FLD RPT : Only files in a folder are
repeatedly played back.
• Moves [FLDR
] button sub folder of
the current folder and displays the first
song in the folder.
Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to
the folder displayed. It will play the first
song in the folder.
• Moves [PTY
], [FLDR
] button
main folder and displays the first song
in the folder.
Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to
the folder displayed.
1. USB Button
4 106
5. INFO Button
Displays the information of the file currently played in the order of FILE NAME
➟ TITLE ➟ ARTIST ➟ ALBUM ➟ FOLDER ➟ TOTAL FILE ➟ NORMAL DISPLAY
➟ FILE NAME... (Displays no information
if the file has no song information.)
7. SEARCH Knob & ENTER
Button
Turn this button clockwise to display the
songs next to the currently played song.
Turn the button counterclockwise to display the songs before the currently
played song.
Press the button to skip and play the
selected song.
8. SCAN Button
Plays 10 seconds of each song in the
USB device.
Press the button once again to cancel
scanning.
Features of your vehicle
9. Fast Button
• Push [FF] button for 0.8 second or
longer to initiate high speed sound
search of current song.
• Push [REW] button for 0.8 second or
longer to initiate reverse direction high
speed sound search of current song.
4 107
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION IN USING USB
DEVICE
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not connected when starting up the vehicle. Connect the device after
starting the vehicle.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB
flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
• It may not play inauthentic MP3 or
WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the compression rate between
8Kbps~320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music
files with the compression rate
between 8 Kbps~320 Kbps.
• Take precautions for static electricity when connecting or disconnecting the external USB
device.
(Continued)
4 108
(Continued)
• An encoded MP3 PLAYER is not
recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of
the external USB device, the connected external USB device can
be unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB devices is
not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE,
then the device will not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device formatted
to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be recognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in contact with the people or other
objects.
• If you repeatedly connect and disconnect the USB device in a short
period of time, you may cause
damage to the device.
• You may hear a strange noise
when connecting or disconnecting a USB device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If you disconnect a external USB
device during playback in USB
mode, the external USB device
can be damaged or may malfunction. Therefore, disconnect the
external USB device when the
audio is turned off or in another
mode (e.g, Radio or CD).
• Depending on the type and
capacity of the external USB
device or the type of files stored
on the device there may be a
delay in the recognition of the
device. This is not an indicator of
trouble.
• Do not use the USB device for
purpose other than playing music
files.
• Use of USB accessories such as
recharges or heaters using USB
I/F may lower performance or
cause trouble.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If you use devices such as a USB
hub purchased separately, the
vehicle’s audio system may not
recognize the USB device. In that
case, connect the USB device
directly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.
• If USB device is divided by logical
drives, only the music files on the
highest-priority drive are recognized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 players, cellular phones and digital cameras
may not be compatible with a
standard USB I/F.
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can
be unrecognizable.
• Some USB flash memory readers
(such as CF, SD, microSD, etc.) or
external-HDD type devices can be
unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are not recognizable.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The data in the USB memory may
be lost while using this audio.
Always back up important data on
a personal storage device.
• Please avoid using USB memory
products which can be used as
key chains or cellular phone
accessories as they could cause
damage to the USB jack. Please
make certain only to use plug
type connector products as
shown below.
4 109
Features of your vehicle
iPod®
■ PA710 (GENERAL)
1. iPod Button
2. TRACK Button
3. RANDOM Button
4. REPEAT Button
5. INFO Button
6. CATEGORY Button
7. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button
■ PA710R (EUROPE)
8. Fast Button
❈ iPod ® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
TQ_PA710_iPod / TQ_PA710R_iPod
4 110
Features of your vehicle
Using iPod®
3. RANDOM Button
When the iPod is connected, the ‘iPod’
icon will be displayed on the top left corner of the display screen.
Press the button for less than 0.8 second
to activate or deactivate the random playback of the songs within the current category. Press the button for longer than
0.8 second to randomly play all songs in
the entire album of the iPod.
Press the button once again to cancel
the mode.
1. iPod Button
If iPod is connected, it switches to the
iPod mode from the CD mode to play the
song files stored in the iPod. If no CD and
auxiliary device is not connected, it displays “No Media” for 3 seconds and
returns to the previous mode.
4. REPEAT Button
Repeats the song currently played.
2. TRACK Button
5. INFO Button
• Press the [TRACK
] button for less
than 0.8 second to play from the beginning of the song currently played.
Press the button for less than 0.8 second and press it again within 1 seconds to move and play the previous
track.
• Press the [SEEK
] button for less
than 0.8 second to move to the next
track.
Displays the information of the file currently played in the order of TITLE ➟
ARTIST ➟ ALBUM ➟ NORMAL DISPLAY ➟ TITLE ➟ ARTIST... (Displays no
information if the file has no song information.)
6. CATEGORY Button
7. SEARCH Knob & ENTER
Button
When you turn the button clockwise, it
will display the songs (category) next to
the song currently played (category in
the same level).
Also, when you turn the button counterclockwise, it will display the songs (category) before the song currently played
(category in the same level).
If you want to listen to the song displayed
in the song category, press the button,
then it will skip to the selected song and
play.
8. Fast Button
• Push [FF] button for 0.8 second or
longer to initiate high speed sound
search of current song.
• Push [REW] button for 0.8 second or
longer to initiate reverse direction high
speed sound search of current song.
Moves to the upper category from currently played category of the iPod.
To move to the category displayed, press
SEARCH/ENTER Button.You will be able
to search through the lower category of
the selected category.
The order of iPod’s category is SONG,
ALBUMS, ARTISTS, GENRES, and
iPod.
4 111
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE FOR USING THE
iPod® DEVICE
• Some iPod models might not support
the communication protocol and the
files will not be played.
Supported iPod models:
- iPod Mini
- iPod 4th (Photo) ~ 6th (Classic) generation
- iPod Nano 1st~4th generation
- iPod Touch 1st~2nd generation
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod can be different
from the order searched in the audio
system.
• If the iPod crashes due to its own malfunction, reset the iPod. (Reset: Refer
to iPod manual)
• An iPod may not operate normally on
low battery.
• Some iPod devices, such as the
iPhone, can be connected through the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology interface. The device must have audio
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology capability (such as for stereo headphone
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology). The
device can play, but it will not be controlled by the audio system.
4 112
CAUTION IN USING THE
iPod® DEVICE
• The HYUNDAI iPod Power Cable
is needed in order to operate iPod
with the audio buttons on the
audio system. The USB cable provided by Apple may cause malfunction and should not be used
for HYUNDAI vehicles.
❋ The HYUNDAI iPod Power Cable
may be purchased through your
HYUNDAI Dealer.
• When connecting the device with
the iPod Power Cable, insert the
connector to the multimedia
socket completely. If not inserted
completely,
communications
between iPod and audio may be
interrupted.
• When adjusting the sound effects
of the iPod and the audio system,
the sound effects of both may
devices will overlap and might
reduce or distort the quality of the
sound.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of an iPod when adjusting the audio system’s volume,
and turn off the equalizer of the
audio system when using the
equalizer of an iPod.
• When the iPod cable is connected, the system can be switched to
the AUX mode even without the
iPod device and may cause noise.
Disconnect the iPod cable when
you are not using the iPod device.
• When not using iPod with car
audio, detach the iPod cable from
iPod. Otherwise, the iPod may
remain in accessory mode, and
may not work properly.
Features of your vehicle
RADIO, VOLUME, AUDIO CONTROL (H800)
1. FM/AM Button
2. POWER Button & VOLUME Knob
3. SEEK Button
4. Preset Buttons
5. BSM Button
6. TUNE & AUDIO Control Knob
4 113
Features of your vehicle
RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME CONTROL
1. FM/AM Button
Pressing the [FM/AM] button selects the
FM/AM band and toggles in the order of
FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ ... ➟ FM1... when
the button is pressed each time. FM/AM
Mode is displayed on the LCD.
2. POWER Button & Volume Knob
Turns the set on/off when the IGNITION
SWITCH is on ACC or ON.
If the button is turned to the right, it
increases the volume and left, decreases
the volume.
3. SEEK Button
• When the [SEEK
] button is
pressed, it increases the band frequency to automatically select a channel. Stops at the previous frequency if
no channel is found.
• When the [TRACK
] button is
pressed, it reduces the band frequency
to automatically select a channel.
Stops at the previous frequency if no
channel is found.
4 114
4. Preset Buttons
Push [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 second to play the channel saved in each
button. Push Preset button for 0.8 second or longer to save current channel to
the respective button with a beep.
5. BSM Button
When the button is pressed, it automatically selects and saves channels with
high reception rate to [PRESET] buttons
[1]~[6] and plays the channel saved in
PRESET1. If no channel is saved after
BSM, it will play the previous channel.
6. TUNE & AUDIO Control Knob
Turn this control while listening to a radio
channel to manually adjust frequency.
Turn clockwise to increase frequency
and counterclockwise to reduce frequency.
Pressing the button changes the BASS,
TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE TUNE
mode. The mode selected is shown on
the display.
After selecting each mode, rotate the
Audio control knob clockwise or counterclockwise.
BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
FADER Control
Turn the control knob clockwise to
emphasize rear speaker sound (front
speaker sound will be attenuated).
When the control knob is turned counterclockwise, front speaker sound will be
emphasized (rear speaker sound will be
attenuated).
BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated). When the control
knob is turned counter clockwise, left
speaker sound will be emphasized (right
speaker sound will be attenuated).
Features of your vehicle
USING USB/AUX (H800)
1. USB Button
2. TRACK Button
3. FF (FAST FORWARD) Button
4. REW (REWIND) Button
5. RPT (REPEAT) Button
6. RDM (RANDOM) Button
7. FLDR (FOLDER) Button
8. SCAN Button
9. INFO Button
10. TUNE Knob & ENTER Button
4 115
Features of your vehicle
USING USB/AUX
3. FF (FAST FORWORD) Button
7. FLDR (FOLDER) Button
1. USB Button
Press the button for 0.8 second or longer
to play the song in forward direction in
fast speed.
• Moves [FLDR
] button sub folder of
the current folder and displays the first
song in the folder.
Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to
the folder displayed. It will play the first
song in the folder.
• Moves [FLDR
] button main folder
and displays the first song in the folder.
Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to
the folder displayed.
If USB/AUX is connected, it switches to
the USB/AUX mode from the other mode
to play the song files stored in the USB.
If no USB and auxiliary device is connected, it displays "NO Media" for 3 seconds and returns to the previous mode.
4. REW (REWIND) Button
Press the button for 0.8 second or longer
to play the song in reverse direction in
fast speed.
❋ AUX Button
5. RPT (REPEAT) Button
If the auxiliary device is connected, it
turns to AUX mode from the other mode
to play the sound from the auxiliary player. If no auxiliary device is connected, it
displays "NO Media" for 3 seconds and
returns to the previous mode.
Press this button for less than 0.8 second
to activate 'RPT' mode and more than
0.8 second to activate 'FLD RPT' mode.
• RPT : Only a file is repeatedly played
back.
• FLD RPT : Only files in a folder are
repeatedly played back.
2. TRACK Button
• Press the [TRACK
] button for less
than 0.8 second to play from the beginning of the song currently played.
Press the button for less than 0.8 second and press it again within 1 second
to move and play the previous track.
• Press the [SEEK
] button for less
than 0.8 second to move to the next
track.
4 116
8. SCAN Button
Plays 10 seconds of each song in the
USB device.
Press the button once again to cancel
scanning.
9. INFO Button
6. RDM (RANDOM) Button
Press this button for less than 0.8 second
to activate 'RDM' mode and more than
0.8 second to activate 'ALL RDM' mode.
• RDM : Only files in a folder are played
back in a random sequence.
• ALL RDM : All files in a USB memory
are played back in the random
sequence.
Displays the information of the file currently played in the order of FILE NAME
➟ TITLE ➟ ARTIST ➟ ALBUM ➟ FOLDER ➟ TOTAL FILE ➟ NORMAL DISPLAY
➟ FILE NAME... (Displays no information
if the file has no song information.)
Features of your vehicle
10. TUNE Knob & ENTER Button
Turn this button clockwise to display the
songs next to the currently played song.
Turn the button counterclockwise to display the songs before the currently
played song.
Press the button to skip and play the
selected song.
CAUTION IN USING USB
DEVICE
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not connected when starting up the vehicle. Connect the device after
starting up.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB
flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
• It may not play inauthentic MP3 or
WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the compression rate between
8Kbps~320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music
files with the compression rate
between 8Kbps~320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static electricity when connecting or disconnecting the external USB
device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• An encoded MP3 PLAYER is not
recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of
the external USB device, the connected external USB device can
be unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB devices is
not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE,
then the device will not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device formatted
to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be recognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in contact with the human body or other
objects.
• If you repeatedly connecting or
disconnecting the USB device in
a short period of time, it may
breakthe device.
• You may hear a noise when connecting or disconnecting a USB
device.
(Continued)
4 117
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If you disconnect the external
USB device during playback in
USB mode, the external USB
device can be damaged or may
malfunction. Therefore, disconnect the external USB device
when the audio is turned off or in
another mode. (e.g, Radio or AUX)
• Depending on the type and
capacity of the external USB
device or the type of the files
stored in the device, there is a difference in the time taken for
recognition of the device.
• Do not use the USB device for
purposes other than playing
music files.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB
I/F may lower performance or
cause trouble.
• If you use devices such as a USB
hub purchased separately, the
vehicle’s audio system may not
recognize the USB device. In that
case, connect the USB device
directly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.
(Continued)
4 118
(Continued)
• If the USB device is divided by
logical drives, only the music files
on the highest-priority drive are
recognized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera can
be unrecognizable by standard
USB I/F can be unrecognizable.
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can
be unrecognizable.
• Some USB flash memory readers
(such as CF, SD, microSD, etc.) or
external-HDD type devices can be
unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are not recognizalbe.
• The data in the USB memory may
be lost while using this audio.
Always back up important data on
a personal storage device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Please avoid using USB memory
products which can be used as
key chains or cellular phone
accessories as they could cause
damage to the USB jack. Please
make certain only to use plug
type connector products as
shown below.
Features of your vehicle
USING iPod® (H800)
1. iPod Button
2. TRACK Button
3. RDM(RANDOM) Button
4. RPT(REPEAT) Button
5. MENU Button
6. INFO Button
7. TUNE Knob & ENTER Button
❈ iPod ® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
4 119
Features of your vehicle
USING iPod®
When the iPod is connected, the 'iPod'
icon will be displayed on the top left corner of the display screen.
1. iPod Button
If iPod is connected, it switches to the
iPod mode from the Radio mode to play
the song files stored in the iPod. If iPod is
not connected, it displays "NO Media" for
3 seconds and returns to the previous
mode.
2. TRACK Button
• Press the [TRACK
] button for less
than 0.8 second to play from the beginning of the song currently played.
Press the button for less than 0.8 second and press it again within 1 second
to move and play the previous track.
Press the button for 0.8 second or
longer to play the song in reverse
direction in fast speed.
• Press the [SEEK
] button for less
than 0.8 second to move to the next
track. Press the button for 0.8 second
or longer to play the song in forward
direction in fast speed.
4 120
3. RDM (RANDOM) Button
6. INFO Button
Press the button for less than 0.8 second
to activate or deactivate the random playback of the songs within the current category. Press the button for longer than
0.8 second to randomly play all songs in
the entire album of the iPod.
Press the button once again to cancel
the mode.
Displays the information of the file currently played in the order of TITLE ➟
ARTIST ➟ ALBUM ➟ NORMAL DISPLAY ➟ TITLE ➟... (Displays no information if the file has no song information.)
4. RPT (REPEAT) Button
Repeats the song currently played.
5. MENU Button
Moves to the upper category from currently played category of the iPod.
To move to (play) the category (song)
displayed, MENU (preset6) You will be
able to search through the lower category of the selected category.
The order of iPod's category is SONG,
ALBUMS, ARTISTS, GENRES, and
iPod.
7. TUNE Knob & ENTER Button
When you turn the button clockwise, it
will display the songs (category) next to
the song currently played (category in
the same level).
Also, when you turn the button counterclockwise, it will display the songs (category) before the song currently played
(category in the same level).
If you want to listen to the song displayed
in the song category, press the button,
then it will skip to the selected song and
play.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE FOR USING THE
iPod® DEVICE
• Some iPod models might not support
the communication protocol and the
files will not be played.
Supported iPod models:
- iPod Mini
- iPod 4th (Photo) ~ 6th (Classic) generation
- iPod Nano 1st~4th generation
- iPod Touch 1st~2nd generation
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod can be different
from the order searched in the audio
system.
• If the iPod disabled due to its own
malfunction, reset the iPod. (Reset:
Refer to iPod manual)
• An iPod may not operate normally on
low battery.
• Some iPod devices, such as the
iPhone, can be connected through the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology interface. The device must have audio
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology capability (such as for stereo headphone
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology). The
device can play, but it will not be controlled by the audio system.
CAUTION IN USING THE
iPod® DEVICE
• The HYUNDAI iPod Power Cable
is needed in order to operate iPod
with the audio buttons on the
audio system. The USB cable provided by Apple may cause malfunction and should not be used
for HYUNDAI vehicles.
❋ The HYUNDAI iPod Power
Cable may be purchased
through your HYUNDAI Dealer.
• When connecting the device with
the iPod Power Cable, insert the
connector to the multimedia
socket completely. If not inserted
completely,
communications
between iPod and audio may be
interrupted.
• When adjusting the sound effects
of the iPod and the audio system,
the sound effects of both may
devices will overlap and might
reduce or distort the quality of the
sound.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of an iPod when adjusting the audio system’s volume,
and turn off the equalizer of the
audio system when using the
equalizer of an iPod.
• When the iPod cable is connected, the system can be switched to
the AUX mode even without the
iPod device and may cause noise.
Disconnect the iPod cable when
you are not using the iPod device.
• When not using iPod with car
audio, detach the iPod cable from
iPod. Otherwise, the iPod may
remain in accessory mode, and
may not work properly.
4 121
Before driving / 5-3
Key positions / 5-4
Starting the engine / 5-6
Manual transmission / 5-9
Automatic transmission / 5-12
Brake system / 5-19
Locking differential / 5-29
Economical operation / 5-30
Special driving conditions / 5-32
Winter driving / 5-37
Trailer towing (for Europe) / 5-41
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle weight / 5-48
5
Driving your vehicle
E010000AEN
WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately.
• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear
a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your
garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.
• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area
with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
If you must drive with the tailgate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are
kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
5 2
Driving your vehicle
BEFORE DRIVING
E020100AUN
E020200BUN
E020300AUN
Before entering vehicle
Necessary inspections
Before starting
• Be sure that all windows, outside mirror(s), and outside lights are clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind
you if you intend to back up.
Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid
should be checked on a regular basis,
with the exact interval depending on the
fluid. Further details are provided in section 7, “Maintenance”.
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are
easily reached.
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview
mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and make
sure the brake warning light goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are familiar with your vehicle and its equipment.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
a loss of vehicle control, that may
lead to an accident, severe personal
injury, and death. The driver’s primary responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and use
of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take
the driver’s eyes, attention and focus
away from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used during
operation of the vehicle.
WARNING
All passengers must be properly
belted whenever the vehicle is moving. Refer to “Seat belts” in section
3 for more information on their
proper use.
WARNING
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for people,
especially children, before putting a
car into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
5 3
Driving your vehicle
KEY POSITIONS
WARNING - Driving under
the influence of alcohol or
drugs
Drinking and driving is dangerous.
Drunk driving is the number one
contributor to the highway death
toll each year. Even a small amount
of alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgment. Driving
while under the influence of drugs
is as dangerous or more dangerous
than driving drunk.
You are much more likely to have a
serious accident if you drink or
take drugs and drive.
If you are drinking or taking drugs,
don’t drive. Do not ride with a driver who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated driver
or call a cab.
5 4
WARNING
• When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on, be
careful not to depress the accelerator pedal for a long period of
time. It may overheat the engine
or exhaust system and cause fire.
• When you make a sudden stop or
turn the steering wheel rapidly,
loose objects may drop on the
floor and it could interfere with
the operation of the foot pedals,
possibly causing an accident.
Keep all things in the vehicle
safely stored.
• If you do not focus on driving, it
may cause an accident. Be careful when operating what may disturb driving such as audio or
heater. It is the responsibility of
the driver to always drive safely.
OTQ057001
E030100AEN
Illuminated ignition switch
(if equipped)
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will be illuminated for your
convenience, provided the ignition switch
is not in the ON position. The light will go
off immediately when the ignition switch
is turned on or go off after about 30 seconds when the door is closed.
Driving your vehicle
E030202AUN
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and electrical accessories are operative.
✽ NOTICE
If difficulty is experienced in turning the
ignition switch to the ACC position, turn
the key while turning steering wheel
right and left to release the tension.
OTQ057002
Ignition switch position
E030201AUN
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. The ignition key can be
removed only in the LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, push the key inward at
the ACC position and turn the key toward
the LOCK position.
E030203AUN
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is the
normal running position after the engine
is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the
engine is not running to prevent battery
discharge.
E030204AUN
START
Turn the ignition switch to the START
position to start the engine. The engine
will crank until you release the key; then
it returns to the ON position. The brake
warning lamp can be checked in this
position.
E030205AUN
WARNING - Ignition
switch
• Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is
moving. This would result in loss of
directional control and braking
function, which could cause an accident.
• The anti-theft steering column lock
is not a substitute for the parking
brake. Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always make sure the shift
lever is engaged in P (Park) for the
automatic transmission and set the
parking brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement may occur if
these precautions are not taken.
• Never reach for the ignition switch,
or any other controls through the
steering wheel while the vehicle is in
motion. The presence of your hand
or arm in this area could cause a
loss of vehicle control, an accident
and serious bodily injury or death.
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver’s seat as they may
move while driving, interfere with
the driver and lead to an accident.
5 5
Driving your vehicle
STARTING THE ENGINE
E040000BUN
WARNING
• Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots,etc.) may interfere with
your ability to use the brake and
accelerator pedal, and the clutch
(if equipped).
• Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed. The
vehicle can move and lead to an
accident.
• Wait until the engine rpm is normal. The vehicle may suddenly
move if the brake padel is
released when the rpm is high.
5 6
E040100AUN
Starting the gasoline engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transmission - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the transmission into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
while turning the ignition switch to the
start position.
Automatic Transmission - Place the
transmission shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to START and
hold it there until the engine starts (a
maximum of 10 seconds), then
release the key.
It should be started without depressing
the accelerator.
4. Do not wait for the engine to warm up
while the vehicle remains stationary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and decelerating should be avoided.)
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while you are in
motion, do not attempt to move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position. If
traffic and road conditions permit,
you may put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the vehicle
is still moving and turn the ignition
switch to the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
CAUTION
• Do not engage the starter for
more than 10 seconds. If the
engine stalls or fails to start, wait
5 to 10 seconds before re-engaging the starter. Improper use of
the starter may damage it.
• Do not turn the ignition switch to
the START position with the
engine running. It may damage
the starter.
Driving your vehicle
E040101AUN
Starting the diesel engine
To start the diesel engine when the
engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated
before starting the engine and then have
to be warmed up before starting to drive.
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transmission - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the transmission into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
while turning the ignition switch to the
start position.
Automatic Transmission - Place the
transmission shift lever in P(park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when the
shift lever is in the N(neutral) position.
E040101ATQ
✽ NOTICE - A2.5/A2 2.5
Diesel Engine
Glow indicator light
If the accelerator is pressed for a long
time while standing still, the engine
power will be limited to prevent the
exhaust parts from overheating.
W-60
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position to pre-heat the engine. Then the
glow indicator light will illuminate.
4. If the glow indicator light goes out, turn
the ignition switch to the START position and hold it there until the engine
starts (a maximum of 10 seconds),
then release the key.
✽ NOTICE
If the engine were not started within 10
seconds after the preheating is completed, turn the ignition switch once more to
the LOCK position during 10 seconds,
and then to the ON position, in order to
preheat again.
5 7
Driving your vehicle
Starting and stopping the engine for turbocharger intercooler
1. Do not race or accelerate the engine
immediately after starting.
If the engine is cold, idle for several
seconds before sufficient lubrication is
ensured in the turbocharger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driving,
requiring a heavy engine load, idle the
engine about 1 minute before turning it
off.
This idle time will allow the turbocharger to cool prior to shutting the
engine off.
CAUTION
Do not turn the engine off immediately after it has been subjected to
a heavy load. Doing so may cause
severe damage to the engine or turbocharger unit.
5 8
Driving your vehicle
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
E050100DTQ
■ Type A
Manual transmission operation
N
■ Type B
The manual transmission has 5 (or 6, if
equipped) forward gears.
This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift
knob. The transmission is fully synchronized in all forward gears so shifting to
either a higher or a lower gear is easily
accomplished.
Press the clutch pedal down fully while
shifting, then release it slowly.
If your vehicle is equipped with an ignition lock switch, the engine will not start
when starting the engine without
depressing the clutch pedal. (if equipped)
The gearshift lever must be returned to
the neutral position before shifting into R
(Reverse).
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before shifting into R (Reverse).
Never operate the engine with the
tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.
CAUTION
• When downshifting from fifth
gear to fourth gear, caution
should be taken not to inadvertently press the gear shift lever
sideways in such a manner that
second gear is engaged. Such a
drastic downshift may cause the
engine speed to increase to the
point that the tachometer will
enter the red-zone. Such overrevving of the engine may possibly cause engine damage.
• Do not downshift more than 2
gears or downshift the gear when
the engine is running at high
speed (5,000 RPM or higher).
Such a downshifting may damage
the engine, clutch and the transmission.
The shift lever can be moved without
pulling the ring (1).
The ring (1) must be pulled up while
moving the shift lever.
OTQ057004/OCM050003
5 9
Driving your vehicle
• During cold weather, shifting may be
difficult until the transmission lubricant
is warmed up. This is normal and not
harmful to the transmission.
• If you've come to a complete stop and
it's hard to shift into 1st or R(Reverse),
leave the shift lever at N(Neutral) position and release the clutch. Press the
clutch pedal back down, and then shift
into 1st or R(Reverse) gear position.
CAUTION
• To avoid premature clutch wear
and damage, do not drive with
your foot resting on the clutch
pedal. Also, don’t use the clutch
to hold the vehicle stopped on an
uphill grade, while waiting for a
traffic light, etc.
• Do not use the shift lever as a
handrest during driving, as this
can result in premature wear of
the transmission shift forks.
• To prevent possible damage to
the clutch system, do not start
with the 2nd (second) gear
engaged except when you start
on a slippery road.
5 10
E050101AUN
WARNING
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off. Then
make sure the transmission is
shifted into 1st gear when the
vehicle is parked on a level or
uphill grade, and shifted into R
(Reverse) on a downhill grade.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle
movement can occur if these precautions are not followed in the
order identified.
• If your vehicle has a manual
transmission not equipped with a
ignition lock switch, it may move
and cause a serious accident
when starting the engine without
depressing the clutch pedal while
the parking brake is released and
the shift lever not in the N
(Neutral) position.
• Do not use the engine brake
(shifting from a high gear to
lower gear) rapidly on slippery
roads. The vehicle may slip causing an accident.
Using the clutch
The clutch should be pressed all the way
to the floor before shifting, then released
slowly. The clutch pedal should always be
fully released while driving. Do not rest
your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This can cause unnecessary wear.
Do not partially engage the clutch to hold
the car on an incline. This causes unnecessary wear. Use the foot brake or parking brake to hold the car on an incline. Do
not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and
repeatedly.
E050102AUN
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy traffic or while driving up steep hills, downshift before the engine starts to labor.
Downshifting reduces the chance of
stalling and gives better acceleration
when you again need to increase your
speed. When the vehicle is traveling
down steep hills, downshifting helps
maintain safe speed and prolongs brake
life.
Driving your vehicle
E050200AUN
Good driving practices
• Never take the car out of gear and
coast down a hill. This is extremely
hazardous. Always leave the car in
gear.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause
them to overheat and malfunction.
Instead, when you are driving down a
long hill, shift to a lower gear. When
you do this, engine braking will help
slow the car.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. This will help avoid over-revving
the engine, which can cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter cross
winds. This gives you much better control of your car.
• Be sure the car is completely stopped
before you attempt to shift into reverse.
The transmission can be damaged if
you do not. To shift into reverse,
depress the clutch, move the shift lever
to neutral, wait 3 seconds, then shift to
the reverse position.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed limits.
5 11
Driving your vehicle
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Type A
Lock release button prevents shift lever
movement without first depressing the
button.
Type B
Lock release button prevents shift lever
movement without first depressing the
button.
O/D button
Automatic mode
Sports mode
Depress the brake pedal and lock release button when shifting, if your vehicle is
equipped with shift lock system
The lock release button must be depressed while moving the shift lever.
The shift lever can be moved without depressing the lock release button.
OTQ057006G/OTQ057006
E060000AEN
5 12
Driving your vehicle
E060100BTQ
Automatic transmission operation
The automatic transmission has 5 (or 4)
forward speeds and one reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected automatically, depending on the position of
the shift lever.
✽ NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if
the battery has been disconnected, may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and the shifting sequence will
adjust after shifts are cycled a few times
by the TCM (Transmission Control
Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control
Module).
For smooth operation, depress the brake
pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a
forward or reverse gear.
WARNING - Automatic
transmission
• Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before
shifting a car into D (Drive) or R
(Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Unexpected
and sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order identified.
• Do not use the engine brake
(shifting from a high gear to
lower gear) rapidly on slippery
roads. The vehicle may slip causing an accident.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to your transmission, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any forward gear position with the
brakes on.
• When stopped on an incline, do
not hold the vehicle stationary
with engine power. Use the service brake or the parking brake.
• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P
(Park) into D (Drive), or R
(Reverse) when the engine is
above idle speed.
5 13
Driving your vehicle
E060101DTQ
Transmission ranges
The indicator in the instrument cluster
displays the shift lever position when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into P (Park). This position locks
the transmission and prevents the drive
wheels from rotating.
CAUTION
The transmission may be damaged
if you shift into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transmission if you shift into R
while the vehicle is in motion,
except as explained in “Rocking the
vehicle” in this section.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion will cause the
drive wheels to lock which will
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
• Do not use the P (Park) position
in place of the parking brake.
Always make sure the shift lever
is latched in the P (Park) position
and set the parking brake fully.
• Never leave a child unattended in
a vehicle.
5 14
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or service brakes are applied.
WARNING
Do not drive with the shift lever in N
(Neutral).
The engine brake will not work and
lead to an accident.
Driving your vehicle
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving position. The transmission will automatically
shift through a 5 (or 4)-gear sequence,
providing the best fuel economy and
power.
L (Low, if equipped)
Move the shift lever to this position in
hard pulling situations and for climbing
steep grades.
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing grades, depress the
accelerator fully, at which time the transmission will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear.
Do not exceed the recommended
maximum speeds in 2 (Second
Gear) or L (Low). Operating the
vehicle at speeds above the maximum recommended, for 2 (Second
Gear) or L (Low) may cause excessive heat to develop which could
result in damage to or failure of the
automatic transmission.
✽ NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into D (Drive).
2 (Second Gear, if equipped)
Use 2 (Second Gear) for more power
when climbing hills and for increased
braking when going down hills. This position also helps reduce wheel spin on slippery surfaces. When the shift lever is
placed in 2 (Second Gear), the transmission will automatically shift from first to
second gear.
CAUTION
OTQ057007G
O/D (Over Drive) system
(if equipped)
Pressing the O/D system button cancels
and engages the overdrive system.
When the O/D system is cancelled, the
O/D OFF indicator illuminates and the
transmission gear range is limited to 1st
through 3rd.
5 15
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
The transmission will not shift to 4th gear
until the O/D system button is pressed
again to release the switch.
When driving down a sloping road with
the transmission in O/D (4th), you can
decrease the vehicle speed without using
the brakes by pressing the O/D button.
When the ignition is switched OFF, O/D
OFF mode is automatically cancelled.
O/D OFF Indicator
This indicator light illuminates in the
instrument panel when the O/D mode is
cancelled.
+ (UP)
Sports mode
- (DOWN)
OTQ057007
E060102BTQ
Sports mode (if equipped)
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion, sports mode is selected by pushing the shift lever from the D (Drive) position into the manual gate. To return to D
(Drive) range operation, push the shift
lever back into the main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift lever
backwards and forwards will allow you to
make gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to a
manual transmission, the sports mode
allows gearshifts with the accelerator
pedal depressed.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to
shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once
to shift down one gear.
5 16
• In sports mode, the driver must execute upshifts in accordance with road
conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 5 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the shift lever
to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position
as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are made
automatically when the vehicle slows
down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear
is automatically selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine rpm
approaches the red zone shift points
are varied to upshift automatically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety, the
system may not execute certain
gearshifts when the shift lever is operated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+(up) position. This causes the transmission to shift into the 2nd gear
which is better for smooth driving on
a slippery road. Push the shift lever to
the -(down) side to shift back to the 1st
gear.
Driving your vehicle
E060200AEN
Good driving practices
• Never move the gear shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the gear shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in motion.
• Be sure the car is completely stopped
before you attempt to shift into R
(Reverse).
• Never take the car out of gear and
coast down a hill. This may be
extremely hazardous. Always leave the
car in gear when moving.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when you are driving
down a long hill, shift to a lower gear.
When you do this, engine braking will
help slow the car.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may
not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do not
depend on placing the transmission in
P (Park) to keep the car from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the accelerator pedal.
(Continued)
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed limits.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
(Continued)
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward of backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
5 17
Driving your vehicle
E060203AUN
E060203ATQ
Moving up a steep grade from a standing start
To move up a steep grade from a standing start, depress the brake pedal, shift
the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the
appropriate gear depending on load
weight and steepness of the grade, and
release the parking brake. Depress the
accelerator gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
When accelerating from a stop on a
steep hill, the vehicle may have a tendency to roll backwards. Shifting the
shift lever into 2 (Second Gear) will
help prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards.
Shift lock system (if equipped)
Ignition key interlock system
(if equipped)
For your safety, the Automatic
Transmission has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transmission
out of P (Park) unless the brake pedal is
depressed.
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position. If the ignition switch is in any
other position, the key cannot be
removed.
To shift the transmission out of P (Park):
Type A
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Depress the lock release button and
move the shift lever.
Type B (If the ignition key interlock system is equipped)
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition to
the ON position.
3. Depress the lock release button and
move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering
sound near the shift lever may be heard.
This is a normal condition.
5 18
Driving your vehicle
BRAKE SYSTEM
E070100BUN
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a stalled
engine or some other reason, you can
still stop your vehicle by applying greater
force to the brake pedal than you normally would. The stopping distance, however, will be longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially depleted
each time the brake pedal is applied. Do
not pump the brake pedal when the
power assist has been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.
WARNING - Brakes
• Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormal high brake temperatures, excessive brake lining
and pad wear, and increased
stopping distances.
• When descending a long or steep
hill, shift to a lower gear and
avoid continuous application of
the brakes. Continuous brake
application will cause the brakes
to overheat and could result in a
temporary loss of braking performance.
• Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’s ability to safely slow down;
the vehicle may also pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
Applying the brakes lightly will
indicate whether they have been
affected in this way. Always test
your brakes in this fashion after
driving through deep water. To
dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always, confirm the position of
the brake and accelerator pedal
before driving. If you do not
check the position of the accelerator and brake pedal before driving, you may depress the accelerator instead of the brake pedal. It
may cause a serious accident.
E070101AUN
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while the
vehicle is in motion, you can make an
emergency stop with the parking brake.
The stopping distance, however, will be
much greater than normal.
WARNING - Parking brake
Applying the parking brake while
the vehicle is moving at normal
speeds can cause a sudden loss of
control of the vehicle. If you must
use the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in applying the brake.
5 19
Driving your vehicle
E070102AUN
Disc brakes wear indicator
Your vehicle has disc brakes.
When your brake pads are worn and new
pads are required, you will hear a highpitched warning sound from your front
brakes or rear brakes (if equipped). You
may hear this sound come and go or it
may occur whenever you depress the
brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when you first apply (or lightly
apply) the brakes. This is normal and
does not indicate a problem with your
brakes.
CAUTION
• To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
• Always replace brake pads as
complete front or rear axle sets.
WARNING - Brake wear
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs service.
If you ignore this audible warning,
you will eventually lose braking
performance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
5 20
CAUTION
• Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad and brake rotor wear.
• Do not operate the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving
except in an emergency situation.
It could damage the vehicle system and make endanger driving
safety.
OTQ057008
Parking brake
E070201BFD
Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and then without pressing
the release button in, pull the parking
brake lever up as far as possible. In addition it is recommended that when parking
the vehicle on a gradient, the shift lever
should be positioned in the appropriate
low gear on manual transmission vehicles or in the P (Park) position on automatic transmission vehicles.
Driving your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type B
WARNING
OTQ057009
E070202AFD
Releasing the parking brake
To release the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and pull up the parking
brake lever slightly. Secondly depress the
release button (1) and lower the parking
brake lever (2) while holding the button.
• To prevent unintentional movement when stopped and leaving
the vehicle, do not use the
gearshift lever in place of the
parking brake. Set the parking
brake AND make sure the
gearshift lever is securely positioned in 1st (First) gear or R
(Reverse) for manual transmission equipped vehicles and in P
(Park) for automatic transmission
equipped vehicles.
• Never allow anyone who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch
the parking brake. If the parking
brake is released unintentionally,
serious injury may occur.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadvertent movement of the car which
can injure occupants or pedestrians.
W-75/WK-23
Check the brake warning light by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). This light will be illuminated when
the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking brake
is fully released and the brake warning
light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on after
the parking brake is released while engine
is running, there may be a malfunction in
the brake system. Immediate attention is
necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the vehicle immediately. If that is not possible,
use extreme caution while operating the
vehicle and only continue to drive the
vehicle until you can reach a safe location or repair shop.
5 21
Driving your vehicle
E070300AEN-EE
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
(if equipped)
WARNING
ABS (or ESP) will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers. Even
though vehicle control is improved
during emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance between
you and objects ahead. Vehicle
speeds should always be reduced
during extreme road conditions.
The braking distance for cars
equipped with an anti-lock braking
system (or Electronic Stability
Program System) may be longer
than for those without it in the following road conditions.
During these conditions the vehicle
should be driven at reduced
speeds:
• Rough, gravel or snow-covered
roads.
• With tire chains installed.
(Continued)
5 22
(Continued)
• On roads where the road surface
is pitted or has different surface
height.
The safety features of an ABS (or
ESP) equipped vehicle should not
be tested by high speed driving or
cornering. This could endanger the
safety of yourself or others.
The ABS continuously senses the speed
of the wheels. If the wheels are going to
lock, the ABS system repeatedly modulates the hydraulic brake pressure to the
wheels.
When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit
from your ABS in an emergency situation, do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to pump
your brakes. Press your brake pedal as
hard as possible or as hard as the situation warrants and allow the ABS to control the force being delivered to the
brakes.
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
CAUTION
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the anti-lock brake system
is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake system,
your vehicle still requires sufficient
stopping distance. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake system
may result in a longer stopping distance than for vehicles equipped with a
conventional brake system.
W-78
CAUTION
• If the ABS warning light is on and
stays on, you may have a problem
with the ABS. In this case, however, your regular brakes will work
normally.
• The ABS warning light will stay on
for approximately 3 seconds after
the ignition switch is ON. During
that time, the ABS will go through
self-diagnosis and the light will go
off if everything is normal. If the
light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS.We recommend that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and operate your brakes continuously, the ABS will be active continuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your car
over to a safe place and stop the
engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS
system
is
normal.
Otherwise, you may have a problem with the ABS. We recommend
that you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
✽ NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the engine
may not run as smoothly and the ABS
warning light may turn on at the same
time. This happens because of the low
battery voltage. It does not mean your
ABS is malfunctioning.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
5 23
Driving your vehicle
Electronic
stability program (ESP) /
■ Type A
Left-Hand drive type
Electronic stability control (ESC)
(If equipped)
■ Type B
Left-Hand drive type
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) /
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system
is designed to stabilize the vehicle during
cornering maneuvers. ESP (ESC) checks
where you are steering and where the
vehicle is actually going.
ESP (ESC) applies the brakes at
individual wheels and intervenes in the
engine management system to stabilize
the vehicle.
Right-Hand drive type
Right-Hand drive type
OTQ057010L/OTQ057010R
5 24
WARNING
OTQ054010L/OTQ054010R
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when cornering. Electronic stability program
(ESP) / Electronic stability control
(ESC) will not prevent accidents.
Excessive speed in turns, abrupt
maneuvers and hydroplaning on
wet surfaces can still result in serious accidents. Only a safe and
attentive driver can prevent accidents by avoiding maneuvers that
cause the vehicle to lose traction.
Even with ESP (ESC) installed,
always follow all the normal precautions for driving - including driving
at safe speeds for the conditions.
Driving your vehicle
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system
is an electronic system designed to help
the driver maintain vehicle control under
adverse conditions. It is not a substitute for
safe driving practices. Factors including
speed, road conditions and driver steering
input can all affect whether ESP (ESC) will
be effective in preventing a loss of control.
It is still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to leave
a sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ESP (ESC) is active.
✽ NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the Electronic Stability
Program (Electronic stability control)
System is functioning properly.
ESP (ESC) operation
ESP (ESC) ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESP (ESC) and ESP
(ESC) OFF indicator lights
illuminate for approximately 3
seconds, then ESP (ESC) is
turned on.
• Press the ESP (ESC) OFF
button for at least half a second after turning the ignition
ON to turn ESP (ESC) off.
(ESP (ESC) OFF indicator will
illuminate). To turn the ESP
(ESC) on, press the ESP
(ESC) OFF button (ESP (ESC)
OFF indicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight ticking
sound. This is the ESP (ESC)
performing an automatic system self-check and does not
indicate a problem.
When operating
■ Type A
When the ESP (ESC) is in
operation, ESP (ESC) indicator
ESP light blinks.
• When the Electronic Stability
Program (Electronic Stability
■ Type B
Control) is operating properly,
you can feel a slight pulsation
in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and indicates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the mud
or slippery road, pressing the
accelerator pedal may not
cause the engine rpm (revolutions per minute) to increase.
5 25
Driving your vehicle
ESP (ESC) operation off
ESP (ESC) OFF state
■ Type A
• To cancel ESP (ESC) operapress the ESP (ESC)
ESP tion,
OFF button (ESP (ESC) OFF
OFF indicator light illuminates).
• If the ignition switch is turned
■ Type B
to LOCK position when ESP
(ESC) is off, ESP (ESC)
remains off. Upon restarting
the engine, the ESP (ESC) will
automatically turn on again.
✽ NOTICE
■ Type A
• ESP indicator light
ESP
■ Type B
• ESC indicator light
• ESP OFF indicator light
ESP
OFF
• ESC OFF indicator light
After reconnecting or recharging a discharged battery, the ESP (ESC) indicator may illuminate. In this case, turn the
steering wheel half way to the left and
right while the ignition switch is in the
ON position. Then, restart the engine
after the ignition is off. If the ESP (ESC)
indicator does not turn off, we recommend that the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON, the
indicator light illuminates, then goes off if
the ESP (ESC) system is operating normally.
The ESP (ESC) indicator light blinks
whenever ESP (ESC) is operating or illuminates when ESP (ESC) fails to operate. ESP (ESC) OFF indicator light
comes on when the ESP (ESC) is turned
off with the button.
5 26
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the ESP (ESC) system to malfunction. When replacing
tires, make sure they are the same
size as your original tires.
WARNING
The Electronic Stability Program
(Electronic stability control) system
is only a driving aid; use precautions for safe driving by slowing
down on curved, snowy, or icy
roads. Drive slowly and don’t
attempt to accelerate whenever the
ESP (ESC) indicator light is blinking, or when the road surface is
slippery.
Driving your vehicle
ESP (ESC) OFF usage
When driving
• The ESP (ESC) turned on for daily
driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESP (ESC) off while driving,
press the ESP (ESC) OFF button while
driving on a flat road surface.
Never press the ESP (ESC) OFF button
while ESP (ESC) is operating (ESP
(ESC) indicator light blinks).
If ESP (ESC) is turned off while ESP
(ESC) is operating, the vehicle may slip
out of control.
✽ NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the ESP
(ESC) is turned off (ESP (ESC) OFF
light illuminated). If the ESP (ESC) is
left on, it may prevent the vehicle
speed from increasing, and result in
false diagnosis.
• Turning the ESP (ESC) off does not
affect ABS or brake system operation.
E070600AFD
WARNING
Never press the ESP (ESC) OFF
button while ESP (ESC) is operating.
If the ESP (ESC) is turned off while
ESP (ESC) is operating, the vehicle
may go out of control.
To turn ESP (ESC) off while driving,
press the ESP (ESC) OFF button
while driving on a flat road surface.
Good braking practices
WARNING
• Whenever leaving vehicle or
parking, always set the parking
brake as far as possible and fully
engage the vehicle's transmission into the park position.
Vehicles not fully engaged in park
with the parking brake set are at
risk for moving inadvertently and
injuring yourself or others.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadvertent movement of the car which
can injure occupants or pedestrians.
5 27
Driving your vehicle
• After parking the vehicle, check to be
sure the parking brake is not engaged
and that the parking brake indicator
light is out before driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the car is washed. Wet brakes
can be dangerous! Your car will not
stop as quickly if the brakes are wet.
Wet brakes may cause the car to pull
to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns to
normal, taking care to keep the car
under control at all times. If the braking
action does not return to normal, stop
as soon as it is safe to do so and we
recommend that you call an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Don't coast down hills with the car out
of gear. This is extremely hazardous.
Keep the car in gear at all times, use
the brakes to slow down, then shift to a
lower gear so that engine braking will
help you maintain a safe speed.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting
your foot on the brake pedal while driving can be dangerous because it can
result in the brakes overheating and
losing their effectiveness. It also
increases the wear of the brake components.
5 28
• If a tire goes flat while you are driving,
apply the brakes gently and keep the
car pointed straight ahead while you
slow down. When you are moving
slowly enough for it to be safe to do so,
pull off the road and stop in a safe
place.
• If your car is equipped with an automatic transmission, don't let your car
creep forward. To avoid creeping forward, keep your foot firmly on the
brake pedal when the car is stopped.
• Use caution when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake and
place the gear selector lever in P (automatic transmission) or in first or
reverse gear (manual transmission). If
your car is facing downhill, turn the
front wheels into the curb to help keep
the car from rolling. If your car is facing
uphill, turn the front wheels away from
the curb to help keep the car from
rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to keep
the car from rolling, block the wheels.
• Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when
there is an accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if the
brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the
parking brake may freeze, apply it only
temporarily while you put the gear
selector lever in P (automatic transmission) or in first or reverse gear (manual transmission) and block the rear
wheels so the car cannot roll. Then
release the parking brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade
with the accelerator pedal. This can
cause the transmission to overheat.
Always use the brake pedal or parking
brake.
Driving your vehicle
LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL (IF EQUIPPED)
E080000ATQ
Wagon/Van (If equipped)
A locking differential, if equipped, is for
the rear wheel differential only. The features of this locking differential are
described below:
Just as with a conventional differential,
the wheel on one side is allowed to turn
at a different speed from the wheel on
the other side when the vehicle is cornering. The difference between the locking differential and a conventional differential is that if the wheel on one side of
the vehicle loses traction, a greater
amount of torque is applied to the rear
wheel on the other side to improve traction.
✽ NOTICE
In a stationary position, the LD
(Locking Differential) will operate when
the difference of the revolution speed
between the rear right wheel and the
rear left wheel occurs.
The following procedures can be used to
confirm that the locking differential is
functioning properly:
(1) Position the vehicle so that one wheel
is on a dry paved surface and the
other on ice, snow, mud, etc. Drive
the vehicle, and observe the operation of the locking differential. The
vehicle should not become stuck if
the differential is functioning properly.
(2) Depress the accelerator pedal gradually, and then when traction is good,
depress it forcefully. If the vehicle
accelerates well, the differential is
functioning properly.
✽ NOTICE
CAUTION
• Never start the engine with the
gearshift lever placed in the forward or reverse while one of the
rear wheels is jacked up and the
other in contact with the ground;
doing so may cause the vehicle to
jump forward.
• If one of the rear wheels begins to
spin in mud, snow, etc., the vehicle can sometimes be driven out
by depressing the accelerator
pedal further; however, avoid running the engine continuously at
high rpm because doing so could
damage the locking differential.
Usually a locking differential will operate and release automatically but occasionally it may not release automatically.
At this time you will feel the tire is
dragged when you are driving or cornering. You can release it manually by slightly turning the steering wheel right and
left while the vehicle is moving slowly.
5 29
Driving your vehicle
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
E100000AFD
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where you
drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how many
miles (kilometers) you can get from a gallon (liter) of fuel. To operate your vehicle
as economically as possible, use the following driving suggestions to help save
money in both fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderate rate. Do not make "jack-rabbit"
starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain
a steady cruising speed. Don't race
between stoplights. Try to adjust your
speed to that of the other traffic so you
don't have to change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever
possible. Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you can
avoid unnecessary braking. This also
reduces brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster
you drive, the more fuel your car uses.
Driving at a moderate speed, especially on the highway, is one of the most
effective ways to reduce fuel consumption.
5 30
• Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal.
This can increase fuel consumption
and also increase wear on these components. In addition, driving with your
foot resting on the brake pedal may
cause the brakes to overheat, which
reduces their effectiveness and may
lead to more serious consequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pressure.
Incorrect inflation, either too much or
too little, results in unnecessary tire
wear. Check the tire pressures at least
once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are aligned
correctly. Improper alignment can
result from hitting curbs or driving too
fast over irregular surfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tire wear and may
also result in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your car in good condition. For
better fuel economy and reduced
maintenance costs, maintain your car
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in Section 7. If you drive your
car in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see Section
7 for details).
• Keep your car clean. For maximum
service, your vehicle should be kept
clean and free of corrosive materials. It
is especially important that mud, dirt,
ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate
on the underside of the car. This extra
weight can result in increased fuel consumption and also contribute to corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Do not carry unnecessary
weight in your car. Weight reduces fuel
economy.
• Do not let the engine idle longer than
necessary. If you are waiting (and not
in traffic), turn off your engine and
restart only when you're ready to go.
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After the
engine has started, allow the engine to
run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing the vehicle in gear. In very cold
weather, however, give your engine a
slightly longer warm-up period.
• Do not "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in too high
a gear resulting in the engine bucking.
If this happens, shift to a lower gear.
Over-revving is racing the engine
beyond its safe limit. This can be avoided by shifting at the recommended
speeds.
Driving your vehicle
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is operated by engine power so your fuel economy is reduced when you use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset some of
this loss, slow down when driving in
these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating condition is important both for economy and
safety. Therefore, we recommend that the
system be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Engine off during motion
Never turn the engine off to coast
down hills or anytime the vehicle is
in motion. The power steering and
power brakes will not function
properly without the engine running. Instead, keep the engine on
and downshift to an appropriate
gear for engine braking effect. In
addition, turning off the ignition
while driving could engage the
steering wheel lock resulting in
loss of vehicle steering which
could cause serious injury or
death.
5 31
Driving your vehicle
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
E110100AUN
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions are
encountered such as water, snow, ice,
mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow
these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden movements in braking or
steering.
• When braking with non-ABS brakes
pump the brake pedal with a light upand-down motion until the vehicle is
stopped.
WARNING - ABS
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use
second gear. Accelerate slowly to
avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or
other non-slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when stalled
in ice, snow, or mud.
WARNING - Downshifting
Downshifting with an automatic
transmission, while driving on slippery surfaces can cause an accident. The sudden change in tire
speed could cause the tires to skid.
Be careful when downshifting on
slippery surfaces.
E110200ATQ
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to
free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn
the steering wheel right and left to clear
the area around your front wheels. Then,
shift back and forth between 1st (First)
and R (Reverse) in vehicles equipped
with a manual transmission or R
(Reverse) and any forward gear in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission. Do not race the engine, and
spin the wheels as little as possible. If
you are still stuck after a few tries, have
the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to
avoid engine overheating and possible
damage to the transmission.
CAUTION
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine over-heating, transmission
damage or failure, and tire damage.
5 32
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, especially
at speeds more than 56 km/h (35
mph). Spinning the wheels at high
speeds when the vehicle is stationary could cause a tire to overheat
which could result in tire damage
that may injure bystanders.
✽ NOTICE
The ESP system (if equipped) should be
turned OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward of backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
OTQ056051
OCM053010
E110300AUN
E110400AUN
Smooth cornering
Driving at night
Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet.
Ideally, corners should always be taken
under gentle acceleration. If you follow
these suggestions, tire wear will be held
to a minimum.
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight, here
are some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance
between you and other vehicles, as it
may be more difficult to see at night,
especially in areas where there may
not be any street lights.
5 33
Driving your vehicle
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare
from other driver's headlights.
• Keep your headlights clean and properly aimed on vehicles not equipped
with the automatic headlight aiming
feature. Dirty or improperly aimed
headlights will make it much more difficult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlights
of oncoming vehicles. You could be
temporarily blinded, and it will take
several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness.
5 34
E110500AUN
E110600AUN
Driving in the rain
Driving in flooded areas
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not prepared for the slick pavement. Here are a
few things to consider when driving in the
rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to
see and will increase the distance
needed to stop your vehicle, so slow
down.
• Keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape. Replace your
windshield wiper blades when they
show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condition,
making a quick stop on wet pavement
can cause a skid and possibly lead to
an accident. Be sure your tires are in
good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles
can affect your brakes. If you must go
through puddles, try to drive through
them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking operation returns.
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel hub.
Drive through any water slowly. Allow
adequate stopping distance because
brake performance may be affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several
times while the vehicle is moving slowly.
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with the
off-road conditions where you are going
to drive before you begin driving.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
1TQA1004
E110700AUN
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pressures
will result in overheating and possible
failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires which
may result in reduced traction or tire failure.
• Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death.
Always check tires for proper
inflation before driving. For proper tire pressures, refer to “Tires
and wheels” in section 9.
• Driving on tires with no or insufficient tread is dangerous. Wornout tires can result in loss of
vehicle control, collisions, injury,
and even death. Worn-out tires
should be replaced as soon as
possible and should never be
used for driving. Always check
the tire tread before driving your
car. For further information and
tread limits, refer to “Tires and
wheels” in section 7.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil
High speed travel consumes more fuel
than urban motoring. Do not forget to
check both engine coolant and engine
oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may result
in overheating of the engine.
✽ NOTICE
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure shown on the tires.
5 35
Driving your vehicle
E111000AEN
Reducing the risk of a rollover
This multi-purpose passenger vehicle is
defined as a Sports Utility Vehicle (SUV).
SUV’s have higher ground clearance
and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of offroad applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of
gravity than ordinary cars. An advantage
of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, which allows you to
anticipate problems. They are not
designed for cornering at the same
speeds as conventional passenger drive
vehicles, any more than low-slung sports
cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. Due to this risk,
driver and passengers are strongly recommended to buckle their seat belts. In
a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. There are steps that a driver
can make to reduce the risk of a rollover.
If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers, do not load your roof
rack with heavy cargo, and never modify
your vehicle in any way.
5 36
WARNING - Rollover
As with other Sports Utility Vehicle
(SUV), failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control, an accident or vehicle
rollover.
• Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles.
• Specific design characteristics
(higher ground clearance, narrower track, etc.) give this vehicle
a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
• A SUV is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional vehicles.
• Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers.
• In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a
seat belt. Make sure everyone in
the vehicle is properly buckled
up.
Driving your vehicle
WINTER DRIVING
1TQA3005
E120000AUN
The more severe weather conditions of
winter result in greater wear and other
problems. To minimize the problems of
winter driving, you should follow these
suggestions:
E120100AUN
E120101AUN
Snowy or icy conditions
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehicle,
make sure they are radial tires of the
same size and load range as the original
tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels
to balance your vehicle’s handling in all
weather conditions. Keep in mind that the
traction provided by snow tires on dry
roads may not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may
be necessary to use snow tires or to
install tire chains on your tires. If snow
tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and type of the
original equipment tires. Failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of your car. Furthermore, speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications, and sharp turns are potentially
very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine braking
to the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause
skids to occur. You need to keep sufficient distance between the vehicle in
operation in front and your vehicle. Also,
apply the brake gently. It should be noted
that installing tire chains on the tire will
provide a greater driving force, but will
not prevent side skids.
✽ NOTICE
Tire chains are not legal in all countries.
Check the country lows before fitting
tire chains.
WARNING - Snow tire size
Snow tires should be equivalent in
size and type to the vehicle's standard tires. Otherwise, the safety
and handling of your vehicle may
be adversely affected.
Do not install studded tires without first
checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against
their use.
5 37
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION
OTQ057011
E120102ATQ
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner, they can be damaged by mounting some types of snow chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tires is recommended instead of snow chains. Do
not mount tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels; snow
chains may cause damage to the wheels.
If snow chains must be used, use wiretype chains with a thickness of less than
15 mm (0.59 in). Damage to your vehicle
caused by improper snow chain use is
not covered by your vehicle manufacturers warranty.
When using tire chains, attach them to
the rear tires.
5 38
• Make sure the snow chains are
the correct size and type for your
tires. Incorrect snow chains can
cause damage to the vehicle body
and suspension and may not be
covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty. Also, the snow
chain connecting hooks may be
damaged from contacting vehicle
components causing the snow
chains to come loose from the
tire. Make sure the snow chains
are SAE class “S” certified.
• Always check chain installation
for proper mounting after driving
approximately 0.5 to 1 km (0.3 to
0.6 miles) to ensure safe mounting. Retighten or remount the
chains if they are loose.
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the manufacturer's instructions and mount them as
tightly as you can. Drive slowly with
chains installed. If you hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop and
tighten them. If they still make contact,
slow down until it stops. Remove the
chains as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
WARNING
- Mounting chains
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning flashers and place
a triangular emergency warning
device behind the vehicle if available. Always place the vehicle in P
(Park), apply the parking brake and
turn off the engine before installing
snow chains.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Tire chains
• The use of chains may adversely
affect vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 30 km/h (20 mph)
or the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, sharp turns, and other
road hazards, which may cause
the vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or lockedwheel braking.
CAUTION
• Chains that are the wrong size or
improperly installed can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body and wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
E120200AUN
E120400AEN
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
Your vehicle is delivered with high quality
ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling
system. It is the only type of coolant that
should be used because it helps prevent
corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water pump and prevents
freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish
your coolant in accordance with the
maintenance schedule in section 7.
Before winter, have your coolant tested to
assure that its freezing point is sufficient
for the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
In some climates it is recommended that
a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be
used during cold weather. See section 9
for recommendations. If you aren't sure
what weight oil you should use, we recommend that you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
E120300AEN
Check battery and cables
E120500AUN
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect your spark plugs as described in
section 7 and replace them if necessary.
Also check all ignition wiring and components to be sure they are not cracked,
worn or damaged in any way.
Winter puts additional burdens on the
battery system. Visually inspect the battery and cables as described in section
7. We recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
5 39
Driving your vehicle
E120600AUN
E120800AUN
E121000AUN
To keep locks from freezing
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Carry emergency equipment
To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an
approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into
the key opening. If a lock is covered with
ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing
fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is
frozen internally, you may be able to thaw
it out by using a heated key. Handle the
heated key with care to avoid injury.
E120700AEN
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window washer
system from freezing, add an approved
window washer anti-freeze solution in
accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is
available from an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do
not use engine coolant or other types of
anti-freeze as these may damage the
paint finish.
5 40
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged position.
This is most likely to happen when there
is an accumulation of snow or ice around
or near the rear brakes or if the brakes
are wet. If there is a risk the parking
brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the gear selector lever in
P (automatic transmission) or in first or
reverse gear (manual transmission) and
block the rear wheels so the car cannot
roll. Then release the parking brake.
E120900AUN
Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and ice
can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in
severe winter conditions where this may
happen, you should periodically check
underneath the car to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering
components is not obstructed.
Depending on the severity of the weather where you drive your car, you should
carry appropriate emergency equipment.
Some of the items you may want to carry
include tire chains, tow straps or chains,
flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a
shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,
gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket,
etc.
Driving your vehicle
TRAILER TOWING (FOR EUROPE)
✽ NOTICE - For Europe
E140000BFD
If you are considering towing with your
car, you should first check with your
country's Department of Motor Vehicles
to determine their legal requirements.
Since laws vary the requirements for towing trailers, cars, or other types of vehicles or apparatus may differ. We recommend that you ask an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Towing a trailer
If you don't use the correct equipment and drive improperly, you can
lose control when you pull a trailer.
For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work
well - or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously or
fatally injured. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in
this section.
• The technically permissible maximum
load on the rear axle(s) may be
exceeded by not more than 15 % and
the technically permissible maximum
laden mass of the vehicle may be
exceeded by not more than 10 % or
100 kg (220.4 lbs), whichever value is
lower. In this case, do not exceed 100
km/h (62.1 mph) for vehicle of category M1 or 80 km/h (49.7 mph) for vehicle of category N1.
• When towing a trailer, the additional
load imposed at the trailer coupling
device may cause the rear tire maximum load ratings to be exceeded, but
not by more than 15%. In such a case,
do not exceed 100 Km/h, and the rear
tire pressure should be at least 20
kPa(0.2 bar) above the tire pressure(s)
as recommended for normal use (i.e.
without a trailer attached).
CAUTION
WARNING - Weight limits
Before towing, make sure the total
trailer weight, gross combination
weight, gross vehicle weight, gross
axle weight and trailer tongue load
are all within the limits.
Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in
costly repairs not covered by your
warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify
what the vehicle trailering capacity is for
your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the trailer” that
appears later in this section.
Remember that trailering is different than
just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling,
durability, and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering requires correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
This section contains many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your
safety and that of your passengers.
Please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the
engine, transmission, wheel assemblies,
and tires are forced to work harder
against the load of the added weight. The
engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads.
This additional burden generates extra
heat. The trailer also adds considerably
to wind resistance, increasing the pulling
requirements.
5 41
Driving your vehicle
E140100AUN
E140200AUN
E140300AUN
Hitches
Safety chains
Trailer brakes
It's important to have the correct hitch
equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks
going by, and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
• Will you have to make any holes in the
body of your vehicle when you install a
trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to
seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch.
If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can
get into your vehicle, as well as dirt and
water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are not
intended for hitches. Do not attach
rental hitches or other bumper-type
hitches to them. Use only a framemounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trailer.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not
drop to the road if it becomes separated
from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by
the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your trailer.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
If your trailer is equipped with a braking
system, make sure it conforms to your
country’s regulations and that it is properly installed and operating correctly.
If your trailer weighs more than the maximum trailer weight without trailer brakes
loaded, then it needs its own brakes and
they must be adequate. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
• Don’t tap into your vehicle's brake system.
5 42
WARNING - Trailer brakes
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolutely
certain that you have properly set
up the brake system. This is not a
task for amateurs. Use an experienced, competent trailer shop for
this work.
Driving your vehicle
E140400AUN
E140402AUN
E140405AFD
Driving with a trailer
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up
ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And,
because of the increased vehicle length,
you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has
to have a different turn signal flasher and
extra wiring. The green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you
signal a turn or lane change. Properly
connected, the trailer lights will also flash
to alert other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows
on your instrument panel will flash for
turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signals
when, in fact, they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working. You must also
check the lights every time you disconnect and then reconnect the wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting system
directly to your vehicle’s lighting system.
Use only an approved trailer wiring harness.
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer can
assist you in installing the wiring harness.
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting out
for the open road, you must get to know
your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the
feel of handling and braking with the
added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not
nearly so responsive as your vehicle is
by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch
and platform, safety chains, electrical
connector(s), lights, tires and mirror
adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are
working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be
sure that the load is secure, and that the
lights and any trailer brakes are still working.
E140401AUN
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving
your vehicle without a trailer. This can
help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
E140403AUN
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel
with one hand. Then, to move the trailer
to the left, just move your hand to the left.
To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly
and, if possible, have someone guide
you.
E140404AUN
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal. Do this so your
trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs,
road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid
jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well
in advance.
WARNING
Failure to use an approved trailer
wiring harness could result in damage to the vehicle electrical system
and/or personal injury.
5 43
Driving your vehicle
E140406ATQ
Driving on grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear
before you start down a long or steep
downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you
might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hot and no longer
operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and
reduce your speed to around 70 km/h (45
mph) to reduce the possibility of engine
and transmission overheating.
If your trailer weighs more than the maximum trailer weight without trailer brakes
and you have an automatic transmission,
you should drive in D (Drive) when towing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) when
towing a trailer will minimize heat build up
and extend the life of your transmission.
CAUTION
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay
close attention to the engine
coolant temperature gauge to
ensure the engine does not overheat.
(Continued)
5 44
(Continued)
If the needle of the coolant temperature gauge moves across the
dial towards “H” (HOT), pull over
and stop as soon as it is safe to
do so, and allow the engine to idle
until it cools down. You may proceed once the engine has cooled
sufficiently.
• You must decide driving speed
depending on trailer weight and
uphill grade to reduce the possibility of engine and transmission
overheating.
CAUTION
Going uphill under hot ambient
temperature (above 35°C) with GVW
and/or trailer, a minimal fuel tank
level of 5 liter has to be assured in
order to prevent power limitation
due to fuel overheating as well as
further damages in the fuel injection equipment.
E140407BUN
Parking on hills
Generally, if you have a trailer attached to
your vehicle, you should not park your
vehicle on a hill. People can be seriously
or fatally injured, and both your vehicle
and the trailer can be damaged if unexpectedly roll down hill.
WARNING - Parking on a
hill
Parking your vehicle on a hill with a
trailer attached could cause serious injury or death, should the trailer break loose.
However, if you ever have to park your
trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:
1. Pull the vehicle into the parking space.
Turn the steering wheel in the direction
of the curb (right if headed down hill,
left if headed up hill).
2. If the vehicle has a manual transmission, place the car in neutral. If the
vehicle has an automatic transmission,
place the car in P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake and shut off the
vehicle.
4. Place chocks under the trailer wheels
on the down hill side of the wheels.
Driving your vehicle
5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes, shift
to neutral, release the parking brake
and slowly release the brakes until the
trailer chocks absorb the load.
6. Reapply the brakes, reapply the parking brake and shift the vehicle to R
(Reverse) for manual transmission or
P (Park) automatic transmission.
7. Shut off the vehicle and release the
vehicle brakes but leave the parking
brake set.
WARNING - Parking brake
It can be dangerous to get out of
your vehicle if the parking brake is
not firmly set.
If you have left the engine running,
the vehicle can move suddenly. You
or others could be seriously or
fatally injured.
When you are ready to leave after parking on a hill
1. With the manual transmission in
Neutral or automatic transmission in P
(Park), apply your brakes and hold the
brake pedal down while you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of
the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and
store the chocks.
E140500AUN
Maintenance when trailer towing
Your vehicle will need service more often
when you regularly pull a trailer.
Important items to pay particular attention to include engine oil, automatic
transmission fluid, axle lubricant and
cooling system fluid. Brake condition is
another important item to frequently
check. Each item is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them
quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea
to review these sections before you start
your trip.
Don’t forget to also maintain your trailer
and hitch. Follow the maintenance
schedule that accompanied your trailer
and check it periodically. Preferably, conduct the check at the start of each day’s
driving. Most importantly, all hitch nuts
and bolts should be tight.
CAUTION
• Due to higher load during trailer
usage, overheating might occur
in hot days or during uphill driving. If the coolant gauge indicates
over-heating, switch off the A/C
and stop the vehicle in a safe area
to cool down the engine.
• When towing check transmission
fluid more frequently.
• If your vehicle is not equipped
with the air conditioner, you
should install a condenser fan to
improve engine performance
when towing a trailer.
5 45
Driving your vehicle
E140600ATQ
<For Europe>
If you do decide to pull a trailer
Here are some important points if you
decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control. You can
ask a hitch dealer about sway control.
• Do not do any towing with your car during its first 2,000 km (1,200 miles) in
order to allow the engine to properly
break in. Failure to heed this caution
may result in serious engine or transmission damage.
• When towing a trailer, we recommend
that you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer on additional requirements such as a towing kit, etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (less than 100 km/h (60
mph)).
• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed
70 km/h (45 mph) or the posted towing
speed limit, whichever is lower.
• The chart contains important considerations that have to do with weight:
5 46
Engine
A2.5/A2 2.5
Diesel Engine
Manual
transmission
700
Automatic
transmission
750
Gasoline Engine
Without brake
Manual
transmission
750
trailer
System
(1653)
(1543)
(1653)
weight
With brake
2300
1500
1500
System
(5070)
(3306)
(3306)
100
100
100
(220)
(220)
(220)
from rear wheel center
1170
1170
1170
to coupling point
(46)
(46)
(46)
Item
Maximum
kg (Ibs.)
Maximum permissible
static vertical load on
the coupling device
kg (Ibs.)
Recommended distance
mm (Inch)
Driving your vehicle
E140602AEN
Tongue Load
Total Trailer Weight
C190E01JM
E140601AUN
Weight of the trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be? It
should never weigh more than the maximum trailer weight with trailer brakes. But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your
trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road
grades, outside temperature and how
often your vehicle is used to pull a trailer
are all important. The ideal trailer weight
can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
Weight of the trailer tongue
The tongue load of any trailer is an
important weight to measure because it
affects the total gross vehicle weight
(GVW) of your vehicle. This weight
includes the curb weight of the vehicle,
any cargo you may carry in it, and the
people who will be riding in the vehicle.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the GVW because
your vehicle will also be carrying that
weight.
The trailer tongue should weigh a maximum of 10% of the total loaded trailer
weight, within the limits of the maximum
trailer tongue load permissible. After
you've loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to
see if the weights are proper. If they
aren’t, you may be able to correct them
simply by moving some items around in
the trailer.
Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight
C190E02JM
WARNING - Trailer
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be loaded
with approximately 60% of the
total trailer load; the rear should
be loaded with approximately
40% of the total trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or trailer towing equipment. Improper
loading can result in damage to
your vehicle and/or personal
injury. Check weights and loading
at a commercial scale or highway
patrol office equipped with
scales.
• An improperly loaded trailer can
cause loss of vehicle control.
5 47
Driving your vehicle
VEHICLE WEIGHT
E160000AUN
E160400AUN
E160800AUN
This section will guide you in the proper
loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to
keep your loaded vehicle weight within its
design rating capability, with or without a
trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehicle
design performance. Before loading your
vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a
trailer, from the vehicle's specifications
and the certification label:
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) - including vehicle
curb weight and all payload.
Overloading
E160100AUN
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle including
a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers,
cargo, or optional equipment.
E160500AUN
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). These numbers are shown on
the certification label.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its GAWR.
E160600AUN
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual
Cargo Weight plus passengers.
E160200AUN
E160700AUN
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your dealer
plus any aftermarket equipment.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). The GVWR is shown on the certification label located on the driver’s (or
front passenger’s) door sill.
E160300AUN
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added to
the Base Curb Weight, including cargo
and optional equipment.
5 48
WARNING - Vehicle weight
The gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) and the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle are on the certification label
attached to the driver's (or front
passenger’s) door. Exceeding
these ratings can cause an accident or vehicle damage. You can
calculate the weight of your load by
weighing the items (and people)
before putting them in the vehicle.
Be careful not to overload your
vehicle.
Road warning / 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving / 6-2
If the engine will not start / 6-3
Emergency starting / 6-4
If the engine overheats / 6-6
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 6-7
If you have a flat tire / 6-11
Towing / 6-20
Emergency commodity / 6-25
What to do in an emergency
6
What to do in an emergency
ROAD WARNING
It should be used whenever emergency
repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the ignition switch in any position. The flasher
switch is located in the center console
switch panel. All turn signal lights will
flash simultaneously.
Left-Hand drive type
OTQ067001L
Right-Hand drive type
OTQ067001R
F010100AUN
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as a
warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
6 2
• The hazard warning flasher operates
whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when the
hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using the
hazard warning flasher while the vehicle is being towed.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
WHILE DRIVING
F020100AUN
If the engine stalls at a crossroad
or crossing
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the
N(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.
• If your vehicle has a manual transaxle
not equipped with the ignition lock
switch, the vehicle can move forward
by shifting to the 2 (second) or 3 (third)
gear and then turning the starter without depressing the clutch pedal.
F020200AUN
If you have a flat tire while driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
and let the car slow down while driving
straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes
immediately or attempt to pull off the
road as this may cause a loss of control. When the car has slowed to such
a speed that it is safe to do so, brake
carefully and pull off the road. Drive off
the road as far as possible and park on
firm, level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
2. When the car is stopped, turn on your
emergency hazard flashers, set the
parking brake and put the transmission
in P (automatic transmission) or
reverse (manual transmission).
3. Have all passengers get out of the car.
Be sure they all get out on the side of
the car that is away from traffic.
4. When changing a flat tire, follow the
instruction provided later in this section.
F020300AEN
If engine stalls while driving
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, we recommend
that you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
F030100AUN
F030200AEN
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
If engine turns over normally but
does not start
1. If your car has an automatic transmission, be sure the gear selector lever is
in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the
emergency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be
sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate the
starter, the battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be
sure they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start
it. See instructions for "Jump starting".
1. Check fuel level.
2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK
position, check all connectors at the
ignition coils and spark plugs.
Reconnect any that may be disconnected or loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine compartment.
4. If the engine still does not start, we
recommend that you call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
If the engine will not start, do not
push or pull the car to start it. This
could result in a collision or cause
other damage. In addition, push or
pull starting may cause the catalytic converter to be overloaded and
create a fire hazard.
6 3
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
F040100BEN
Jumper Cables
Jump starting
(-)
(+)
(-)
(+)
Booster
battery
Discharged
battery
1VQA4001
F040000AUN
Connect cables in numerical order and
disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting can be dangerous if done
incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to
yourself or damage to your vehicle or
battery, follow the jump starting procedures. If in doubt, we strongly recommend that you have a competent technician or towing service jump start your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Use only a 12-volt jumper system.
You can damage a 12-volt starting
motor, ignition system, and other
electrical parts beyond repair by
use of a 24-volt power supply (either
two 12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the electrolyte level of the battery as this
may cause the battery to rupture or
explode causing serious injury.
6 4
WARNING - Battery
• Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery produces hydrogen gas which may
explode if exposed to flame or
sparks.
If these instructions are not followed exactly, serious personal
injury and damage to the vehicle
may occur! If you are not sure
how to follow this procedure,
seek
qualified
assistance.
Automobile batteries contain sulfuric acid. This is poisonous and
highly corrosive. When jump
starting, wear protective glasses
and be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
car.
• Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte level
is low; the battery may rupture or
explode.
• Do not allow the (+) and (-)
jumper cables to touch. It may
cause sparks.
• The battery may rupture or
explode when you jump start with
a low or frozen battery.
What to do in an emergency
F040101AEN
Jump starting procedure
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12volt and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence shown in the illustration.
First connect one end of a jumper
cable to the positive terminal of the
discharged battery (1), then connect
the other end to the positive terminal
on the booster battery (2).
Proceed to connect one end of the
other jumper cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery (3), then
the other end to a solid, stationary,
metallic point (for example, the engine
lifting bracket) away from the battery
(4). Do not connect it to or near any
part that moves when the engine is
cranked.
Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the correct battery
terminals or the correct ground. Do not
lean over the battery when making
connections.
CAUTION - Battery cables
Do not connect the jumper cable
from the negative terminal of the
booster battery to the negative terminal of the discharged battery.
This can cause the discharged battery to overheat and crack, releasing battery acid.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and let it run at 2,000
rpm, then start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
F040200AUN
Push-starting
Your manual transmission-equipped
vehicle should not be push-started
because it might damage the emission
control system.
Vehicles equipped with automatic transmission cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section for
jump-starting.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge forward
when the engine starts could cause
a collision with the tow vehicle.
6 5
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
F050000BFD
If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, you experience a loss of power,
or hear loud pinging or knocking, the
engine is probably too hot. If this happens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it
is safe to do so.
2. Place the gear selector lever in P
(automatic transmission) or neutral
(manual transmission) and set the
parking brake. If the air conditioning is
on, turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out under
the car or steam is coming out from
the hood, stop the engine. Do not open
the hood until the coolant has stopped
running or the steaming has stopped.
If there is no visible loss of engine
coolant and no steam, leave the
engine running and check to be sure
the engine cooling fan is operating. If
the fan is not running, turn the engine
off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive
belt is missing. If it is not missing,
check to see that it is tight. If the drive
belt seems to be satisfactory, check
for coolant leaking from the radiator,
hoses or under the car. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal
for cold water to be draining from it
when you stop).
WARNING
While the engine is running, keep
hair, hands and clothing away from
moving parts such as the fan and
drive belts to prevent injury.
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken
or engine coolant is leaking out, stop
the engine immediately and we recommend that you call an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This can
allow coolant to be blown out of the
opening and cause serious burns.
6 6
6. If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine temperature has returned to normal. Then,
if coolant has been lost, carefully add
coolant to the reservoir to bring the
fluid level in the reservoir up to the
halfway mark.
7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for
further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again, we recommend that you call an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
• Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling system and we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• When the engine overheats from
low engine coolant, suddenly
adding engine coolant may cause
cracks in the engine. To prevent
damage, add engine coolant
slowly in small quantities.
What to do in an emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
OTQ064023
Low Tire Pressure Telltale/
TPMS Malfunction Indicator
WARNING
Over-inflation or under-inflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure that
may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
6 7
What to do in an emergency
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
6 8
✽ NOTICE
If the TPMS Low Tire Pressure
Telltale does not illuminate for three
seconds when the ignition switch is
in the ON position or when the
engine starts, or if it remains illuminated after coming on for approximately three seconds, take your
vehicle to your nearest authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked.
Low Tire Pressure
Telltale
The TPMS is not a substitute for
manually checking tire pressure with
a tire pressure gauge. Changes in
temperature affect tire pressure. See
“Tires and Wheels” in chapter 7 for
proper tire inflating and tire pressure
measurement procedures.
If the telltale illuminates, immediately
reduce your speed, avoid hard cornering and anticipate increased stopping distances. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible.
Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s
placard or tire inflation pressure label
located on the driver’s side door
jamb. If you cannot reach a service
station or if the tire cannot hold the
newly added air, replace the low
pressure tire with the spare tire.
What to do in an emergency
The Low Tire Pressure Telltale will
remain on and the TPMS Malfunction
Indicator may blink for one minute
and then remain illuminated (when
the vehicle is driven approximately
10 minutes at speed above 25 km/h
(15.5 mph)) until you have the low
pressure tire repaired and replaced
on the vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
The spare tire is not equipped with a
tire pressure sensor.
CAUTION
In winter or cold weather, the
Low Tire Pressure Telltale may
be illuminated if the tire pressure was adjusted to the recommended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunctioning because the decreased temperature leads to a proportional
lowering of tire pressure.
(Continued)
(Continued)
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tire inflation
pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
WARNING
• Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable
and can contribute to loss of
vehicle control and increased
braking distances.
• Continued driving on low
pressure tires can cause the
tires to overheat and fail.
TPMS Malfunction
Indicator
The TPMS Malfunction Indicator
comes on after it blinks for approximately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.
Have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible to determine the cause
of the problem.
✽ NOTICE
The TPMS Malfunction Indicator
may illuminate after blinking for one
minute if the vehicle is near electric
power supply cables or radio transmitters such as police stations, government and public offices, broadcasting stations, military installations,
airports, transmitting towers, etc.
Additionally, the TPMS Malfunction
Indicator may illuminate if snow
chains are used or electronic devices
such as computers, chargers, remote
starters, navigation, etc. This may
interfere with normal operation of
the TPMS.
6 9
What to do in an emergency
Changing a Tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure Telltale and "Low Tire
Pressure" warning (shown on the LCD
display, if equipped) will illuminate. If
you believe you have a flat tire or feel
any vehicle instability, take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and let the vehicle slow down while driving straight
ahead. Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road as
this may cause a loss of control resulting in an accident. When the vehicle
has slowed to such a speed that it is
safe to do so, brake carefully and pull
off the road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on firm, level
ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area
between the two traffic lanes. Replace
the flat tire with the compact spare tire.
CAUTION
To prevent damaging your tire
pressure sensor, never use a
puncture-repairing agents or
tire sealants to repair and/or
inflate a low pressure tire. If
used, you will have to replace
the tire pressure sensor.
6 10
The spare tire is not equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring sensor.
When the low pressure tire or the flat
tire is replaced with the spare tire,
the Low Tire Pressure Telltale will
remain on. Also, the TPMS
Malfunction Indicator will illuminate
after blinking for one minute if the
vehicle is driven at speed above 25
km/h (15.5 mph) for approximately
10 minutes.
Once the original tire equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring sensor is
reinflated to the recommended pressure and reinstalled on the vehicle,
the Low Tire Pressure Telltale and
TPMS Malfunction Indicator will go
off within a few minutes.
If the indicators do not extinguish
after a few minutes, please visit an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem (except for
the spare tire). You must use TPMS
specific wheels. It is recommended
that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING - For EUROPE
• Do not modify the vehicle, it
may interfere with the TPMS
function.
• The wheels on the market do
not have a TPMS sensor.
For your safety, we recommend that you use parts for
replacement from an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If you use the wheels on the
market, use a TPMS sensor
approved by a HYUNDAI dealer. If your vehicle is not
equipped with a TPMS sensor
or TPMS does not work properly, you may fail the periodic
vehicle inspection conducted
in your country.
❈ All vehicles sold in the
EUROPE
market
during
below period must be
equipped with TPMS.
- New model vehicle :
Nov. 1, 2012 ~
- Current model vehicle :
Nov. 1, 2014~ (Based on vehicle registrations)
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
OTQ067003
OTQ067017
F070100ATQ
F070101BUN
Jack and tools
The jack and wheel lug nut wrench
(jack handle) are stored in the storage compartment under the front
passenger’s seat. Open the storage
box cover to reach the equipment.
(1) Jack
(2) Wheel lug nut wrench
(Jack handle)
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
WARNING - Changing tires
• Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or highway.
• Always move the vehicle completely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tire. The jack should
be used on level firm ground.
If you cannot find a firm, level
place off the road, call a towing service company for
assistance.
(Continued)
6 11
What to do in an emergency
(Continued)
• Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking positions on the vehicle; never
use the bumpers or any other
part of the vehicle for jacking
support.
• The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack causing serious
injury or death.
• Do not get under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Make sure any children present are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
6 12
OTQ067004
F070200AEN
Removing and storing the spare
tire
Your spare tire is stored underneath
your vehicle, directly below the cargo
area.
To remove the spare tire:
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Find the plastic hex bolt cover and
remove the cover.
OTQ067005
3. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to
loosen the bolt enough to lower
the spare tire.
Turn the wrench counterclockwise
until the spare tire reaches the
ground.
What to do in an emergency
OTQ067006
4. After the spare tire reaches the
ground, continue to turn the
wrench counterclockwise, and
draw the spare tire outside. Never
rotate the wrench excessively, otherwise the spare tire carrier may
be damaged.
5. Remove the retainer (1) from the
center of the spare tire.
OTQ067007
To store the spare tire:
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the
valve stem facing up.
2. Place the wheel under the vehicle
and install the retainer (1) through
the wheel center.
3. Turn the wrench clockwise until it
clicks.
WARNING
OTQ047006K
F070300ATQ
Changing tires
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Shift the shift lever into R
(Reverse) with manual transmission or P (Park) with automatic
transmission.
3. Activate the hazard warning flasher.
Ensure the spare tire retainer is
properly aligned with the center
of the spare tire to prevent the
spare tire “rattling”. Otherwise,
it may cause the spare tire to
fall off the carrier and lead to an
accident.
6 13
What to do in an emergency
OTQ067022
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack and spare tire from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
6 14
WARNING - Changing a tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
blocked, and that no person
remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
OTQ067008
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
What to do in an emergency
OTQ067018
OTQ067016
7. Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tire
you are changing. Place the jack
at the designated locations under
the frame. The jacking positions
are plates welded to the frame
with two tabs and a raised dot to
index with the jack.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 30 mm (1.2 in).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is stable and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
9. Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To
put the wheel on the hub, pick up
the spare tire, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the wheel
onto them. If this is difficult, tip the
wheel slightly and get the top hole
in the wheel lined up with the top
stud. Then jiggle the wheel back
and forth until the wheel can be
slid over the other studs.
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
6 15
What to do in an emergency
WARNING
Wheels may have sharp edges.
Handle them carefully to avoid
possible severe injury. Before
putting the wheel into place, be
sure that there is nothing on the
hub or wheel (such as mud, tar,
gravel, etc.) that interferes with
the wheel from fitting solidly
against the hub.
If there is, remove it. If there is
not good contact on the mounting surface between the wheel
and hub, the wheel nuts could
come loose and cause the loss
of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may
result in loss of control of the
vehicle. This may cause serious
injury or death.
10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on
the studs, put the wheel nuts on
the studs and tighten them finger
tight. The nuts should be installed
with their tapered small diameter
ends directed inward. Jiggle the
tire to be sure it is completely
seated, then tighten the nuts as
much as possible with your fingers again.
11. Lower the car to the ground by
turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
OTQ067011
Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench handle. Go around the wheel tightening
every other nut until they are all tight.
Then double-check each nut for tightness. After changing wheels, we recommend that the system be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
9~11 kg·m (65~79 lb·ft)
6 16
What to do in an emergency
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is
not replaced, air may leak from the
tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy
another and install it as soon as possible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the stud so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, we recommend that
you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
To prevent the jack, wheel lug nut
wrench and spare tire from rattling
while the vehicle is in motion, store
them properly.
WARNING - Inadequate
spare tire pressure
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing
the spare tire. Adjust it to the
specified pressure, if necessary.
Refer to “Tires and wheels” section 9.
6 17
What to do in an emergency
Jack label
■ Example
• Type A
OHYK064001
• Type B
OHYK064005
• Type C
OHYK064002
❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
6 18
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transaxle or move the
shift lever to the P position on
vehicles with automatic transaxle.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacture
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
What to do in an emergency
EC Declaration of Conformity for Jack
JACKDOC14S
6 19
What to do in an emergency
TOWING
dolly
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the
front wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the rear wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged or the
vehicle is being towed with the rear
wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly
under the rear wheels.
When being towed by a commercial tow
truck and wheel dollies are not used, the
rear of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the front.
OTQ067012
OTQ067009
F080100BTQ
OTQ067010
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary, we
recommend having it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial
tow-truck service. Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel
dollies or flatbed is recommended.
6 20
CAUTION
• Do not tow the vehicle with the
rear wheels on the ground as this
may cause damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use wheel lift or flatbed
equipment.
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an emergency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC position.
2. Place the transmission shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION
Failure to place the transmission
shift lever in N (Neutral) may cause
internal damage to the transmission.
OTQ067019
F080200ATQ
Removable towing hook
(front, if equipped)
1. Remove the towing hook from the tool
case.
2. Remove the hole cover on the front
bumper by turning it.
OTQ067020
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is fully
secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and install
the cover after use.
6 21
What to do in an emergency
Front (if equipped)
OTQ067021
Rear
OTQ067013
F080300AEN
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow
truck service.
6 22
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing hook
under the front (or rear) of the vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing the
vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to
steer it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard-surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the
wheels, axles, power train, steering and
brakes must all be in good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehicle out of mud, sand or other conditions from which the vehicle cannot be
driven out under its own power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the
vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other frequently.
CAUTION
• Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for towing may damage the body of your
vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing
vehicles. Securely fasten the
cable or chain to the towing hook
provided.
• Before emergency towing, check that
the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and
even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical angle.
Always pull straight ahead.
What to do in an emergency
F080301BUN
WARNING
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the
emergency towing hook and towing cable or chain. The hook and
towing cable or chain may break
and cause serious injury or damage.
• If the disabled vehicle is unable
to be moved, do not forcibly continue the towing. Contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial tow truck service for
assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle during towing.
OTQ067014
• Use a towing strap less than 5 m (16
feet) long. Attach a white or red cloth
(about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) in the
middle of the strap for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing strap
is not loosened during towing.
Emergency towing precautions
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the
steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transmission shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking bake.
• Press the brake pedal with more force
than normal since you will have
reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be required
because the power steering system
will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill, the
brakes may overheat and brake performance will be reduced. Stop often
and let the brakes cool off.
6 23
What to do in an emergency
F080400AUN
CAUTION - Automatic
transmission
• If the car is being towed with all
four wheels on the ground, it can
be towed only from the front. Be
sure that the transmission is in
neutral. Be sure the steering is
unlocked by placing the ignition
switch in the ACC position. A
driver must be in the towed vehicle to operate the steering and
brakes.
• To avoid serious damage to the
automatic transmission, limit the
vehicle speed to 15 km/h (10 mph)
and drive less than 1.5 km (1
mile) when towing.
• Before towing, check the automatic transmission fluid leak
under your vehicle. If the automatic transmission fluid is leaking, a flatbed equipment or towing dolly must be used.
6 24
Tie-down hook
(for flatbed towing)
WARNING
Do not use the hooks under the
front (or rear) of the vehicle for towing purposes. These hooks are
designed ONLY for transport tiedown. If the tie-down hooks are
used for towing, the tie-down hooks
or front bumper will be damaged
and this could lead to serious
injury.
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY COMMODITY (IF EQUIPPED)
F110000AUN
F110200AUN
There are some emergency commodities
in the vehicle to help you respond to the
emergency situation.
First aid kit
F110100AUN
There are some items such as scissors,
bandage and adhesive tape and etc. in
the kit to give first aid to an injured person.
Fire extinguisher
If there is small fire and you know how to
use the fire extinguisher, take the following steps carefully.
1. Pull the pin at the top of the extinguisher that keeps the handle from
being accidentally pressed.
2. Aim the nozzle toward the base of the
fire.
3. Stand approximately 2.5 m (8 ft) away
from the fire and squeeze the handle
to discharge the extinguisher. If you
release the handle, the discharge will
stop.
4. Sweep the nozzle back and forth at the
base of the fire. After the fire appears
to be out, watch it carefully since it
may re-ignite.
F110300AUN
Triangle reflector
Place the triangle reflector on the road to
warn oncoming vehicles during emergencies, such as when the vehicle is
parked by the roadside due to any problems.
F110400AUN
To check the tire pressure, take the following steps;
1. Unscrew the inflation valve cap that is
located on the rim of the tire.
2. Press and hold the gauge against the
tire valve. Some air will escape as you
begin and more will escape if you don't
press the gauge in firmly.
3. A firm non-leaking push will activate
the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge to
know whether the tire pressure is low
or high.
5. Adjust the tire pressures to the specified pressure. Refer to “Tires and
wheels” in section 9.
6. Reinstall the inflation valve cap.
Tire pressure gauge
(If equipped)
Tires normally lose some air in day-today use, and you may have to add a few
pounds of air periodically and it is not
usually a sign of a leaking tire, but of normal wear. Always check tire pressure
when the tires are cold because tire pressure increases with temperature.
6 25
Engine compartment / 7-2
Maintenance services / 7-4
Owner maintenance / 7-6
Scheduled maintenance service / 7-7
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-22
Engine oil / 7-25
Engine coolant / 7-26
Brakes and clutch fluid / 7-29
Power steering fluid / 7-30
Automatic transmission fluid / 7-31
Washer fluid / 7-33
Parking brake / 7-34
Fuel filter / 7-34
Air cleaner / 7-35
Climate control air filter / 7-36
Wiper blades / 7-38
Battery / 7-41
Maintenance
Tires and wheels / 7-44
Fuses / 7-55
Light bulbs / 7-64
Appearance care / 7-71
Emission control system / 7-76
7
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ Diesel Engine
4D56
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
(if equipped)
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Fuel filter
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Fuse box
7. Negative battery terminal
A2.5/A2 2.5
8. Positive battery terminal
9. Engine coolant reservoir
10. Engine oil dipstick
11. Radiator cap
12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
13. Air cleaner
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
OTQ077001/OTQ027003
7 2
Maintenance
■ Gasoline Engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
(if equipped)
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Engine coolant reservoir
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Radiator cap
11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
12. Air cleaner
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OTQ077066
7 3
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
G020000BEN
G020100BEN
G020200BEN
You should exercise the utmost care to
prevent damage to your vehicle and
injury to yourself whenever performing
any maintenance or inspection procedures.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient
servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that could lead to
vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury.
Owner’s responsibility
Owner maintenance precautions
✽ NOTICE
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
7 4
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.
We recommend in general that you have
your vehicle serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
You should retain documents that show
proper maintenance has been performed
on your vehicle in accordance with the
scheduled maintenance service charts
shown on the following pages. You need
this information to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is provided
in your Service Passport.
Repairs and adjustments required as a
result of improper maintenance or a lack
of required maintenance are not covered
when your vehicle is covered by warranty.
✽ NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during
the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Service Passport provided with the
vehicle. If you're unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, we recommend that the system be seviced by
an authorized HYUNDAIdealer.
Maintenance
G020300ATQ
WARNING - Maintenance
work
• Performing maintenance work on
a vehicle can be dangerous. You
can be seriously injured while
performing some maintenance
procedures. If you lack sufficient
knowledge and experience or the
proper tools and equipment to do
the work, we recommend that the
system be servied by an authorized HYUNDAIdealer.
• Working under the hood with the
engine running is dangerous. It
becomes even more dangerous
when you wear jewelry or loose
clothing. These can become
entangled in moving parts and
result in injury. Therefore, if you
must run the engine while working under the hood, make certain
that you remove all jewelry (especially rings, bracelets, watches,
and necklaces) and all neckties,
scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the
engine or cooling fans.
CAUTION
• Do not put heavy objects or apply
excessive force on top of the
engine cover (if equipped) or fuel
related parts.
• When you inspect the fuel system
(fuel lines and fuel injection
devices), we recommend that you
contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• Do not drive long time with the
engine cover (if equipped)
removed.
• When checking the engine room,
do not go near fire. Fuel, washer
fluid, etc. are flammable oils that
may cause fire.
• Before touching the battery, ignition cables and electrical wiring,
you should disconnect the battery "-" terminal. You may get an
electric shock from the electric
current.
• When you remove the interior
trim cover with a flat head (-) driver, be careful not to damage the
cover.
• Be careful when you replace and
clean bulbs to avoid burns or
electrical shock.
WARNING - Diesel Engine
Never work on injection system
with engine running or within 30
seconds after shutting off engine.
High-pressure pump, rail, injectors
and high-pressure pipes are subject to high pressure even after the
engine stopped. The fuel jet produced by fuel leaks may cause serious injury, if it touches the body.
People using pacemakers should
not move than 30cm closer to the
ECU or wiring harness within the
engine room while engine is running, since the high currents in the
electronic engine control system
produce considerable magnetic
fields.
7 5
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
G030000AEN
The following lists are vehicle checks and
inspections that should be performed at
the frequencies indicated to help ensure
safe, dependable operation of your vehicle.
If you have any question, we recommend
that you consult an authorized
HYUNDAIdealer.
These Owner Maintenance Checks are
generally not covered by warranties and
you may be charged for labor, parts and
lubricants used.
7 6
Owner maintenance schedule
G030101AUN
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in coolant reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure. This could cause burns
or other serious injury.
G030102AUN
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of the
exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes
in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering
effort or looseness in the steering
wheel, or change in its straight-ahead
position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns
slightly or “pulls” to one side when traveling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for
unusual sounds, pulling to one side,
increased brake pedal travel or “hardto-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transmission occurs,
check the transmission fluid level.
• Check automatic transmission P (Park)
function.
• Check parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle
(water dripping from the air conditioning system during or after use is normal).
Maintenance
G030103AUN
G030105AUN-EU
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least once a year:
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and
hood hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Check the power steering fluid level.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic transmission linkage and controls.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
G030104AUN
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall):
• Check radiator, heater and air conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windshield washer spray and
wiper operation. Clean wiper blades
with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.
• Check headlight alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields
and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear
and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose wheel
lug nuts.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
SERVICE
G040000AUN
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if
the vehicle is usually operated where
none of the following conditions apply. If
any of the following conditions apply, follow Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy
areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in cold
temperatures and/or extremely humid
climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy city
traffic during hot weather above 32°C
(90°F).
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should inspect,
replace or refill more frequently than the
following Normal Maintenance Schedule.
After the periods or distance shown in
the chart, continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.
7 7
Maintenance
G040100GTQ
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (EXCEPT FOR EUROPE A2.5/A2 2.5 DIESEL ENGINE)
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Drive belts *1
Engine oil and
engine oil filter *2
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS Months
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
Miles×1,000
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Km×1,000
15
30
45
60
75
90
105
120
At first, inspect 80,000 km (50,000 miles) or 48 months
Diesel
after that, inspect every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12 months
At first, inspect 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
For Europe
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Gasoline
Except Europe
I
I
I
I
4D56 Diesel
Replace every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 6 months *a
A2.5/A2 2.5
Except Europe
Replace every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months
Diesel
For Middle East
Replace every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 12 months *b
Gasoline
Except Middle
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
East
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*1 : Adjust alternator and power steering (and water pump drive belt) and air conditioner drive belt (if equipped).
Inspect and if necessary correct or replace.
*2 : Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.
*a : Republic of South Africa (If the vehicle is lubricated API CH-4 grade or above) - For every 7,500 km or 6 months, whichever
occurs first : “R”
*b : Driving in summer season temperature over 40°C (104°F - SAUDI, UAE, OMAN, KUWAIT, BAHRAIN, QATAR, IRAN, YEMEN
ETC) or driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h) must conform the severe driving condition.
7 8
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (EXCEPT FOR EUROPE A2.5/A2 2.5 DIESEL ENGINE) (CONT.)
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Fuel additives *3
Valve clearance
Timing belt
Air cleaner filter
Spark plug
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS Months
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
Miles×1,000
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Km×1,000
15
30
45
60
75
90
105
For Europe
Add every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
Gasoline
Except Europe
Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 6 months
4D56 Diesel
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4D56 Diesel
I
R
For China, India, Middle East
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Except China, India, Middle
I
I
R
I
I
R
I
East
Unleaded
Replace every 100,000 km (62,500 miles)
Gasoline
Leaded
Replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles)
96
80
120
I
R
I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*3 : If good quality gasolines meet Europe Fuel standards (EN228) or equivalents including fuel additives is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to
use them. Do not mix other additives.
7 9
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (EXCEPT FOR EUROPE A2.5/A2 2.5 DIESEL ENGINE) (CONT.)
Number of months or driving distance, whichever
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS Months
12
24
36
48
60
Miles×1,000
10
20
30
40
50
MAINTENANCE
Km×1,000
15
30
45
60
75
ITEM
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
I
Vacuum and crankcase ventilation
Gasoline
I
I
hoses
Vacuum hose (for EGR & throttle body) (if equipped)
I
I
I
I
I
Vacuum pump and vaccum hose
Diesel
I
I
I
I
I
Vaccum pump oil hose
Diesel
I
I
I
I
I
For
Europe
I
R
Fuel filter cartridge *4
Diesel
Except Europe*5
I
R
comes first
72
84
60
70
90
105
I
I
I
I
I
I
96
80
120
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
R
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*4 : This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is applicable only when using a qualified fuel < "EN590 or equivalent">.
If the diesel fuel specification doesn't meet the EN590, it must be replaced more frequently. If there are some important safety
matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless
of maintenance schedule and we recommend that you consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
*5 : If the diesel fuel specification doesn't meet the EN590, it must be replaced more frequently. HYUNDAI recommends "every
7,500 km (5,000 miles) inspection, every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) replacement".
7 10
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (EXCEPT FOR EUROPE A2.5/A2 2.5 DIESEL ENGINE) (CONT.)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS Months
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Fuel filter *6
Gasoline
Fuel lines, hoses
Diesel
and connections
Gasoline
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
Miles×1,000
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Km×1,000
15
30
45
60
75
90
105
120
For Europe
Except Europe
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
Inspect “Coolant level and leak” every day
Inspect “Water pump” when replacing the drive belt or timing belt
Cooling system
For Europe
Engine coolant *7
Except Europe
At first, replace at 210,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years:
after that, replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months *8
At first, replace at 200,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years:
after that, replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 24 months *8
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*6 : The fuel filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule
depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and we recommend that you consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
*7 : When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at
the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*8 : For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
7 11
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (EXCEPT FOR EUROPE A2.5/A2 2.5 DIESEL ENGINE) (CONT.)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS Months
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Battery condition
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
Miles×1,000
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Km×1,000
15
30
45
60
75
90
105
120
Inspect every 12,000 km (8,000 miles) or 6 months
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake pedal
I
I
I
I
Parking brake
I
I
I
I
Brake fluid
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Disc brakes and pads
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Power steering fluid and hoses
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
7 12
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (EXCEPT FOR EUROPE A2.5/A2 2.5 DIESEL ENGINE)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS Months
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Miles×1,000
MAINTENANCE
Km×1,000
ITEM
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
15
30
45
60
75
90
105
120
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Propeller shaft
I
I
I
I
Tire (pressure & tread wear)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front suspension ball joints
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Bolt and nuts on chassis and body
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Air conditioner refrigerant (if equipped)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Air conditioner compressor (if equipped)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Climate control air filter (if equipped)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Manual transmission fluid (if equipped)
I
Automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)
Rear axle oil *9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*9 : Rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.
7 13
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (FOR EUROPE A2.5 DIESEL ENGINE) (CONT.)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS Months
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Miles×1,000
Km×1,000
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
12.5
25
37.5
50
20
40
60
80
62.5
75
87.5
100
100
120
140
160
At first, inspect 80,000 km (50,000 miles) or 48 months
after that, inspect every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12 months
Drive Belts *1
Engine oil and engine oil filter *2
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Air cleaner filter
I
R
I
R
I
R
I
R
Vapor hose and fuel filter cap
I
I
I
I
Vacuum hose (for EGR & throttle body) (if equipped)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Vacuum pump and vacuum hose
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Vacuum pump oil hose
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Fuel Filter Cateridge *3
I
I
R
I
I
R
I
I
Fuel line hoses and connections
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*1 : Adjust alternator and power steering (and water pump drive belt) and air conditioner drive belt (if equipped).
Inspect and if necessary correct or replace.
*2 : Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.
*3 : This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is applicable only when using a qualified fuel < "EN590 or equivalent">.
If the diesel fuel specification doesn't meet the EN590, it must be replaced more frequently. If there are some important safety
matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless
of maintenance schedule and we recommend that you consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
7 14
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (FOR EUROPE A2.5 DIESEL ENGINE) (CONT.)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS Months
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Miles×1,000
Km×1,000
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
12.5
25
37.5
50
62.5
75
87.5
100
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Inspect "Coolant level and leak" every day
Cooling system
Inspect "Water pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt
At first, replace at 210,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years :
Engine coolant *4
after that, replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months *5
Inspect every 12,000 km (8,000 miles) or 6 months
Battery Condition
Brake lines, hoses and connections
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake pedal
I
I
I
I
Parking brake
I
I
I
I
Brake/Clutch fluid
I
R
I
R
I
R
I
R
Disc brakes and pads
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Power steering fluid and hoses
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*4 : When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at
the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*5 : For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
7 15
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (FOR EUROPE A2.5 DIESEL ENGINE)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS Months
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Miles×1,000
MAINTENANCE
Km×1,000
ITEM
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
12.5
25
37.5
50
62.5
75
87.5
100
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Propeller shaft
I
I
I
I
Tire (pressure & tread wear)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front suspension ball joints
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Bolt and nuts on chassis and body
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Air conditioner refrigerant (if equipped)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Air conditioner compressor (if equipped)
I
Climate control air filter (if equipped)
R
Manual transmission fluid (if equipped)
R
R
R
R
R
R
Inspect every 60,000 km (37,500 miles) or 48months
Automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)
Inspect every 60,000 km (37,500 miles) or 48months
Rear axle oil *
6
I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*6 : Rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.
7 16
I
I
I
R
I
Maintenance
G040100ATQ-EU
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (FOR EUROPE A2 2.5 DIESEL ENGINE) (CONT.)
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS Months
24
48
72
96
120
144
168
192
Miles×1,000
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
MAINTENANCE
Km×1,000
30
60
90
120
150
180
210
240
ITEM
At
first,
inspect
90,000
km
(60,000
miles)
or
48
months
Drive Belts *1
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Engine oil and engine oil filter *2 *3 *4
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Air cleaner filter
I
R
I
R
I
R
I
R
Vapor hose and fuel filter cap
I
I
I
I
Vacuum hose (for EGR & throttle body) (if equipped)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Vacuum pump and vacuum hose
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Vacuum pump oil hose
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Fuel Filter Cateridge *5
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Fuel line hoses and connections
Inspect every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*1 : Adjust alternator and power steering (and water pump drive belt) and air conditioner drive belt (if equipped). Inspect and if necessary correct
or replace.
*2 : Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip. The engine oil level should be checked regularly and
maintained properly. Operating with an insufficient amount oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.
*3 : If the recommended oil is not available, replace engine oil and engine oil filter every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12 months.
*4 : This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is applicable only when using a qualified fuel <"EN590 or equivalent">. If the diesel fuel
specification doesn't meet the EN590, it must be replaced according to the severe maintenance schedule.
*5 : This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is applicable only when using a qualified fuel < "EN590 or equivalent">. If the diesel fuel
specification doesn't meet the EN590, it must be replaced more frequently. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction,
surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and we recommend
that you consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
7 17
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (FOR EUROPE A2 2.5 DIESEL ENGINE) (CONT.)
MAINTENANCE
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
INTERVALS Months
24
48
72
96
120
144
168
192
Miles×1,000
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
MAINTENANCE
Km×1,000
30
60
90
120
150
180
210
240
ITEM
Inspect "Coolant level and leak" every day
Cooling system
Inspect "Water pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt
At first, replace at 210,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120 months :
Engine coolant *6
after that, replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months *7
Battery Condition
Inspect every 12,000 km (8,000 miles) or 6 months
Brake lines, hoses and connections
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake pedal
I
I
I
I
Parking brake
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake/Clutch fluid (if equipped)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Disc brakes and pads
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Power steering fluid and hoses
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*6 : When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at
the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*7 : For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
7 18
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (FOR EUROPE A2 2.5 DIESEL ENGINE)
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS Months
24
48
72
96
120
144
168
Miles×1,000
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
MAINTENANCE
Km×1,000
30
60
90
120
150
180
210
ITEM
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Propeller shaft
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Tire (pressure & tread wear)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front suspension ball joints
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Bolt and nuts on chassis and body
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Air conditioner refrigerant (if equipped)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Air conditioner compressor (if equipped)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Climate control air filter (if equipped)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Manual transmission fluid (if equipped)
I
I
I
Automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)
I
I
I
Rear axle oil *8
I
I
I
192
160
240
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*8 : Rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.
7 19
Maintenance
G040200ETQ
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals
R
Every 3,000 km (1,850 miles) or 6 months
For Europe
Except Europe
R
R
Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months
Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 6 months
For Europe
R
Maintenance item
4D56 Diesel
Engine oil and
engine oil filter
A2.5
Diesel
A2 2.5
Diesel
For Middle East
Gasoline Except Middle
East
R
R
Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months A, B, C, F, G, H,
I, J, L, M
Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 6 months
Every 7,500 km (5,000 miles) or 6 months
R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
Every 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
Manual transmission fluid (if equipped)
R
Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles)
Automatic transmission fluid For Europe
(if equipped)
Except Europe
4D56 Diesel / Gasoline
For Europe
A2.5
Diesel
Rear axle oil
Except Europe
A2 2.5
For Europe
Diesel
R
R
R
R
R
Every 90,000 km (60,000 miles)
Every 100,000 km (62,000 miles)
Every 90,000 km (60,000 miles)
Every 80,000 km (50,000 miles)
Every 90,000 km (60,000 miles)
R
Every 80,000 km (50,000 miles)
Air cleaner filter
Engine timing belt
7 20
R
4D56 Diesel
Driving
condition
A, B, C, F, G, H,
I, J, K, M
C, E
D, E, F, G
C, D, E, G,
H, I, L
A, C, D, E, F, G,
H, I, L
C, E, G, H, I, L
Maintenance
Maintenance item
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots
Propeller shaft
4D56 Diesel / Gasoline
For Europe
A2.5
Diesel
Except Europe
A2 2.5
For Europe
Diesel
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals
I
I
I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
Every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12 months
Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
I
Every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12 months
I
Front suspension ball joints
I
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors
I
Parking brake
I
Climate control air filter (if equipped)
R
Severe driving conditions
A : Repeated short distance driving
B : Extensive idling
C : Driving in dusty, rough roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive
materials or in very cold weather
E : Driving in sandy areas
F : More than 50 % driving in heavy city traffic during hot
weather above 32°C (90°F)
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
Driving condition
C, D, E, F, G
C, E
C, D, E, F, G
C, D, E, G, H
C, D, G, H
C, E, G
G : Driving on uphill, downhill or mountain roads
H : Towing a trailer or using a camper on roof rack
(if equipped)
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing
J : Driving in very cold weather
K : Driving over 140 km/h (87 mile/h)
L : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
M : Frequently driving in stop - and - go conditions
7 21
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
G050100AUN
G050300ATQ
G050400AEN
Engine oil and filter
Fuel filter (cartridge)
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in the
maintenance schedule. If the car is being
driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven, damage
the emission system and cause multiple
issues such as hard starting. If an excessive amount of foreign matter accumulates in the fuel tank, the filter may
require replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the engine
for several minutes, and check for leaks
at the connections. We recommend that
the fuel filter be replaced by an authoized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
G050200BUN
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. Drive
belts should be checked periodically for
proper tension and adjusted as necessary.
CAUTION
When you are inspecting the belt,
place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF or ACC position.
7 22
CAUTION
In case the fuel filter is clogged due
to not conforming to the maintenance period, the fuel injection
equipment may supply the fuel
insufficiently, which may damage
the fuel injection equipment and
cause the engine to stall at worst
cases.
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. We
recommend that the fuel lines, fuel hoses
and connectionsr be replaced by an
authoized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Diesel only
Never work on injection system
with engine running or within 30
seconds after shutting off engine.
High pressure pump, rail, injectors
and high pressure pipes are subject to high pressure even after the
engine stopped. The fuel jet produced by fuel leaks may cause serious injury, if it touch the body.
People using pacemakers should
not move than 30cm closer to the
ECU or wiring harness within the
engine room while engine is running, since the high currents in the
Common Rail system produce considerable magnetic fields.
Maintenance
G050600AUN
G050800AEN
G051200AUN
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
Air cleaner filter
Coolant
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should
be inspected at those intervals specified
in the maintenance schedule. Make sure
that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is
correctly replaced.
We recommend that the air cleaner filter
be replaced by an authoized HYUNDAI
dealer.
The coolant should be changed at the
intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule.
G050900BUN
G051300AUN
Spark plugs (for gasoline engine)
Manual transmission fluid
(if equipped)
G050700AUN
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses (if equipped)
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence
of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard
and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,
abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention
should be paid to examine those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources,
such as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure that
the hoses do not come in contact with
any heat source, sharp edges or moving
component which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and
that no leaks are present. Hoses should
be replaced immediately if there is any
evidence of deterioration or damage.
Make sure to install new spark plugs of
the correct heat range.
WARNING
Do not disconnect and inspect
spark plugs when the engine is hot.
You may burn yourself.
G051000AEN
Valve clearance (if equipped)
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
We recommend that the system be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
G051100AUN
Cooling system
Check cooling system components, such
as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and
connections for leakage and damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Inspect the manual transmission fluid
according to the maintenance schedule.
G051400ATQ
Automatic transmission fluid
(if equipped)
The fluid level should be in the "HOT"
range of the dipstick, after the engine
and transmission are at normal operating
temperature. Check the automatic transmission fluid level with the engine running and the transmission in neutral, with
the parking brake properly applied.
✽ NOTICE
If your vehicle is not equipped with the
automatic transmission level gauge, we
recommend that the automatic transmission fluid inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer according to the
maintenance schedule.
7 23
Maintenance
G051500AUN
G051900AGD
G052300AEN
Brake hoses and lines
Brake discs, pads, calipers and
rotors
Power steering pump, belt and
hoses
Check the pads for excessive wear, discs
for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid
leakage.
For more information on checking the
pads or lining wear limit, refer to the
HYUNDAI web site.
(http://brakemanual.hmc.co.kr)
Check the power steering pump and
hoses for leakage and damage. Replace
any damaged or leaking parts immediately. Inspect the power steering belt (or
drive belt) for evidence of cuts, cracks,
excessive wear, oiliness and proper tension. Replace or adjust it if necessary.
G052100AUN
G052500AUN
Suspension mounting bolts
Air conditioning refrigerant
(if equipped)
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and any
leakage. Replace any deteriorated or
damaged parts immediately.
G051600AUN
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid
reservoir. The level should be between
“MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of
the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake
fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4
specification.
Check the suspension connections for
looseness or damage. Retighten to the
specified torque.
G051700ATQ
Parking brake
G052200AUN
Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake lever and cables.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine off,
check for excessive free-play in the
steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage.
Check the dust boots and ball joints for
deterioration, cracks, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
7 24
Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage.
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
5. Pull the dipstick out again and check
the level. The level should be between
F and L.
CAUTION
OTQ077002L
G060100CEN
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach
normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few
minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to
return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and
re-insert it fully.
WARNING - Radiator hose
• Do not overfill with engine oil.
Engine damage may result.
• Do not spill engine oil, when
adding or changing engine oil. If
you drop the engine oil on the
engine room, wipe it off immediately.
• When you wipe the oil level
gauge, you should wipe it with a
clean cloth. When mixed with
debris, it can cause engine damage.
CAUTION - Diesel engine
Overfilling the engine oil may cause
severe dieseling due to churning
effect. It may lead to engine damage
accompanied with abrupt engine
speed increment, combustion noise
and white smoke emission.
OTQ077003L
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring
the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil from
being spilled on engine components.
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in section 9.)
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may be
hot enough to burn you.
7 25
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
G070000BUN
G070100BEN
The high-pressure cooling system has a
reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze
coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory. Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at the
beginning of the winter season, and
before traveling to a colder climate.
Checking the coolant level
CAUTION
G060200AEN
Changing the engine oil and filter
We recommend that the engine oil and
filter be replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in
contact with the skin for prolonged
periods of time. Used engine oil
contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by
washing your hands thoroughly
with soap and warm water as soon
as possible after handling used oil.
7 26
• Do not drive with no engine
coolant. It may cause water pump
failure and engine seizure, etc.
• When the engine overheats from
low engine coolant, suddenly
adding engine coolant may cause
cracks in the engine. To prevent
damage, add engine coolant
slowly in small quantities.
WARNING
Removing radiator
cap
• Never attempt to remove the radiator cap while the engine is operating or hot. Doing so might lead
to cooling system and engine
damage and could result in serious personal injury from escaping hot coolant or steam.
• Turn the engine off and wait until
it cools down. Use extreme care
when removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it, and
turn it counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the cap,
using a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
(Continued)
Maintenance
G070101BUN
(Continued)
• Even if the engine is not operating, do not remove the radiator
cap or the drain plug while the
engine and radiator are hot. Hot
coolant and steam may still blow
out under pressure, causing serious injury.
WARNING
The electric motor (cooling fan) is controlled by
engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure and vehicle speed.
It may sometimes operate even
when the engine is not running.
Use extreme caution when working
near the blades of the cooling fan
so that you are not injured by a
rotating fan blades. As the engine
coolant temperature decreases, the
electric motor will automatically
shut off. This is a normal condition.
OTQ077004
Check the condition and connections of
all cooling system hoses and heater
hoses. Replace any swollen or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F and L marks on the side of the
coolant reservoir when the engine is
cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protection
against freezing and corrosion. Bring the
level to F, but do not overfill. If frequent
additions are required, we recommend
that the system be inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle
and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious
malfunction or engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycol-based
coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified
coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less than
35% antifreeze, which would reduce
the effectiveness of the solution.
For mixture percentage, refer to the following table.
Ambient
Temperature
-15°C (5°F)
-25°C (-13°F)
-35°C (-31°F)
-45°C (-49°F)
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze
35
40
50
60
Water
65
60
50
40
7 27
Maintenance
G070200AEN
Changing the coolant
We recommend that the coolant be
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
CAUTION
OTQ072005
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator are
hot. Scalding hot coolant and
steam may blow out under pressure causing serious injury.
7 28
Put a thick cloth around the radiator
cap before refilling the coolant in
order to prevent the coolant from
overflowing into engine parts such
as the generator.
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
Maintenance
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
Use only the specified brake/clutch fluid.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
WARNING - Loss of
brake/clutch fluid
OTQ074006
Checking the brake/clutch fluid
level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir. Before removing the
reservoir cap and adding brake/ clutch
fluid, clean the area around the reservoir
cap thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch
fluid contamination. If the level is low, add
fluid to the MAX level. The level will fall
with accumulated mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the wear of
the brake linings. If the fluid level is
excessively low, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
In the event the brake/clutch system requires frequent additions of
fluid, we recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
✽ NOTICE
Before removing the brake/clutch filter
cap, read the warning on the cap.
WARNING
Clean filler cap before removing.
Use only DOT3 or DOT4 brake/clutch
fluid from a sealed container.
WARNING - Brake/ clutch
fluid
When changing and adding brake/
clutch fluid, handle it carefully. Do
not let it come in contact with your
eyes. If brake/ clutch fluid should
come in contact with your eyes,
immediately flush them with a large
quantity of fresh tap water. Have
your eyes examined by a doctor as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
Do not allow brake/clutch fluid to
contact the vehicle's body paint, as
paint
damage
will
result.
Brake/clutch fluid, which has been
exposed to open air for an extended
time should never be used as its
quality cannot be guaranteed. It
should be disposed of properly.
Don't put in the wrong kind of fluid.
A few drops of mineral-based oil,
such as engine oil, in your brake/
clutch system can damage brake/
clutch system parts.
7 29
Maintenance
POWER STEERING FLUID
✽ NOTICE
Check that the fluid level is in the
"HOT" range on the reservoir. If the
fluid is cold, check that it is in the
"COLD" range.
In the event the power steering system
requires frequent additions of fluid, we
recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OTQ077007
G090100AEN
Checking the power steering fluid
level
With the vehicle on level ground, check
the fluid level in the power steering reservoir periodically. The fluid should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir at the normal temperature.
Before adding power steering fluid, thoroughly clean the area around the reservoir cap to prevent power steering fluid
contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level.
7 30
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to the power
steering pump, do not operate the
vehicle for prolonged periods
with a low power steering fluid
level.
• Never start the engine when the
reservoir tank is empty.
• When adding fluid, be careful that
dirt does not get into the reservoir.
• Too little fluid can result in
increased steering effort and/or
noise from the power steering
system.
• The use of the non-specified fluid
could reduce the effectiveness of
the power steering system and
cause damage to it.
Use only the specified power steering
fluid. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants
or capacities" in section 9.)
G090200AEN
Checking the power steering
hose
Check the connections for oil leaks, damage and twists in the power steering
hose before driving.
Maintenance
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
■ Type A
✽ NOTICE
If your vehicle is not equipped with the
automatic transmission level gauge, we
recommend that the automatic transmission fluid inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer according to the
maintenance schedule.
OTQ077008
■ Type B
If your vehicle is equipped with the
automatic transmission level gauge,
inspect the fluid level as follows.
The automatic transmission fluid level
should be checked regularly.
Keep the vehicle on the level ground with
the parking brake applied and check the
fluid level according to the following procedure.
1. Place the selector lever in N (Neutral)
position and confirm the engine is running at normal idle speed.
2. After the transmission is warmed up
sufficiently (fluid temperature 70~80°C
(158~176°F), for example by 10 minutes usual driving, move the shift lever
through all positions then place the
selector lever in “N (Neutral) or P
(Park)” position.
OTQ073008
G100100ATQ
Checking the automatic transmission fluid level
7 31
Maintenance
WARNING - Transmission
fluid
The transmission fluid level should
be checked when the engine is at
normal operating temperature. This
means that the engine, radiator,
radiator hose and exhaust system
etc., are very hot. Exercise great
care not to burn yourself during
this procedure.
OTQ077009
3. Confirm that the fluid level is in “HOT”
range on the level gauge. If the fluid
level is lower, add the specified fluid
from the fill hole. If the fluid level is
higher, drain the fluid from the drain
hole.
4. If the fluid level is checked in cold condition (fluid temperature 20~30°C
(68~86°F) add the fluid to “C” (COLD)
line and then recheck the fluid level
according to the above step 2.
7 32
CAUTION
• Low fluid level causes transmission slippage. Overfilling can
cause foaming, loss of fluid and
transmission malfunction.
• The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transmission malfunction and failure.
WARNING - Parking brake
To avoid sudden movement of the
vehicle, apply parking brake and
depress the brake pedal before
moving the shift lever.
✽ NOTICE
“C” (COLD) range is for reference only
and should NOT be used to determine
transmission fluid level.
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
✽ NOTICE
New automatic transmission fluid
should be red. The red dye is added so
the assembly plant can identify it as
automatic transmission fluid and distinguish it from engine oil or antifreeze.
The red dye, which is not an indicator of
fluid quality, is not permanent. As the
vehicle is driven, the automatic transmission fluid will begin to look darker.
The color may eventually appear light
brown. Therefore, we recommend that
the system be replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer according to the
Scheduled Maintenance at the beginning of this section.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold climates
to prevent freezing.
Front
WARNING - Coolant
OTQ077010
Rear (if equipped)
Use only the specified automatic transmission fluid. (Refer to “Recommended
lubricants and capacities” in section 9.)
G100200AFD
Changing the automatic transmission fluid
We recommend that the automatic transmission fluid changed by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer according to the maintenance schedule.
OTQ077011
G120100AUN
Checking the washer fluid level
The reservoir is translucent so that you
can check the level with a quick visual
inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain
water may be used if washer fluid is not
available.
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
• Windshield Washer fluid agents
contain some amounts of alcohol
and can be flammable under certain circumstances. Do not allow
sparks or flame to contact the
washer fluid or the washer fluid
reservoir. Damage to the vehicle
or occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is poisonous to humans and animals.
Do not drink and avoid contacting
windshield washer fluid. Serious
injury or death could occur.
7 33
Maintenance
PARKING BRAKE
FUEL FILTER (FOR DIESEL)
G150100AFD
Draining water from fuel filter
OTQ057008
G140100AFD
The fuel filter for diesel engine plays an
important role of separating water from
fuel and accumulating the water in its
bottom.
If water accumulates in the
fuel filter, the warning light
comes on when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
If this warning light turned
on, we recommend that the
system be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Checking the parking brake
Fuel filter cartridge replacement
Check the stroke of the parking brake by
counting the number of “clicks’’ heard
while fully applying it from the released
position. Also, the parking brake alone
should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the stroke is more or
less than specified, we recommend that
the system be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Stroke : 7 “clicks’’ at a force
20 kg (44 lbs, 196 N).
7 34
OTQ077012
G150200AEN
of
CAUTION
If the water accumulated in the fuel
filter is not drained at proper times,
damages to the major parts such as
the fuel system can be caused by
water permeation in the fuel filter.
✽ NOTICE
When replacing the fuel filter cartridge,
we recommend that you use parts for
replacement from an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
OTQ077015
OTQ077013
G160100AEN
Filter replacement
OTQ077014
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching
clips and open the cover.
It must be replaced when necessary, and
should not be cleaned and reused.
OTQ077016
2. Replace the air cleaner filter.
3. Lock the cover with the cover attaching
clips.
7 35
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the element more often than the usual recommended
intervals.
(Refer
to
“Maintenance under severe usage conditions” in this section.)
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed; this will result in excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• We recommend that you use
parts for replacement from an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
7 36
G170100BEN
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should be
replaced according to the maintenance
schedule. If the vehicle is operated in
severely air-polluted cities or on dusty
rough roads for a long period, it should
be inspected more frequently and
replaced earlier. When you replace the
climate control air filter, replace it performing the following procedure, and be
careful to avoid damaging other components.
OTQ077018
G170200ATQ
Filter replacement
1. Open the glove box and remove the
support rod (1).
Maintenance
OTQ077019
OTQ077020
OTQ077021
2. With the glove box open, remove the
stoppers on both sides to allow the
glove box to hang freely on the hinges.
3. Remove the climate control air filter
cover by turning the cover stopper (1)
and then remove the air filters.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
✽ NOTICE
Install a new climate control air filter in
the correct direction with the arrow
facing
downwards.
symbol
(↓)
Otherwise, the climate control effects
may decrease, possibly with a noise.
7 37
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Contamination of either the windshield or
the wiper blades with foreign matter can
reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wipers. Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot
wax treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window and
the blades with a good cleaner or mild
detergent, and rinse thoroughly with
clean water.
1JBA5122
G180100AUN
Blade inspection
✽ NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic car washes have been known to
make the windshield difficult to clean.
7 38
G180200AUN
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the blades may be worn or
cracked, and require replacement.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manually.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.
Maintenance
1JBA7037
OEN076018
1LDA5023
G180201ATQ
G180202AFD
Front windshield wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm.
Rear window wiper blade
(if equipped)
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the
wiper blade assembly.
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it may
chip or crack the windshield.
1JBA7038
2. Compress the clip and slide the blade
assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
7 39
Maintenance
OEN076019
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the slot in
the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms or
other components, we recommend that
the wiper blade be replaced by an
authoized HYUNDAI dealer.
7 40
Maintenance
BATTERY
✽ NOTICE
OTQ077022
G190100DUN
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections
clean, tight, and coated with petroleum
jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the
battery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be used for
an extended time, disconnect the battery cables.
Basically equipped battery is maintenance free type. If your vehicle is
equipped with the battery marked with
LOWER and UPPER on the side, you
can check the electrolyte level. The electrolyte level should be between LOWER
and UPPER. If the electrolyte level is
low, it needs to add distilled (demineralized) water (Never add sulfuric acid or
other electrolyte). When refill, be careful not to splash the battery and adjacent components. And do not overfill the
battery cells. It can cause corrosion on
other parts. After then ensure that tighten the cell caps. We recommend that you
contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Battery
dangers
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes and
all other flames or sparks
away from the battery.
Hydrogen, a highly combustible gas, is always
present in battery cells and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children because
batteries contain highly
corrosive SULFURIC ACID.
Do not allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
(Continued)
7 41
Maintenance
(Continued)
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immediate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel a
pain or a burning sensation, get medical attention
immediately.
Wear eye protection when
charging or working near a
battery. Always provide
ventilation when working in
an enclosed space.
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to
the environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
(Continued)
7 42
(Continued)
• When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the
case may cause battery acid to
leak, resulting in personal injury.
Lift with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
• Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage. Never
touch these components with the
engine running or the ignition
switched on.
Failure to follow the above warnings can result in serious bodily
injury or death.
CAUTION
If you connect unauthorized electronic devices to the battery, the
battery may be discharged. Never
use unauthorized devices.
■ Example
OJD072039
❈ The actual battery label in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
Battery capacity label
1. CMF60L-BCI : The HYUNDAI model
name of battery
2. 12V : The nominal voltage
3. 60Ah(20HR) : The nominal capacity
(in Ampere hours)
4. 92RC : The nominal reserve capacity
(in min.)
5. 550CCA : The cold-test current in
amperes by SAE
6. 440A : The cold-test current in
amperes by EN
Maintenance
G190200AUN
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged in a
short time (because, for example, the
headlights or interior lights were left on
while the vehicle was not in use),
recharge it by slow charging (trickle)
for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while the
vehicle is being used, recharge it at 2030A for two hours.
WARNING - Recharging
battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in an
area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,
or flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charging, and stop or reduce the charging rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if
the temperature of the electrolyte
of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).
• Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
WARNING
• Before performing maintenance
or recharging the battery, turn off
all accessories and stop the
engine.
• The negative battery cable must
be removed first and installed
last when the battery is disconnected.
G190300BTQ
Reset items
Items should be reset after the battery
has been discharged or the battery has
been disconnected.
• Climate control system
(See section 4)
• Clock (See section 4)
• Audio (See section 4)
• Auto up/down window (See section 4)
• Trip computer (See section 4)
7 43
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
G200100AUN
CAUTION
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
G200200AEN
Recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1.6 km (one mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehicle handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure,
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
9.
7 44
OTQ087003
All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label
attached to the vehicle.
WARNING - Tire underinflation
Severe underinflation can lead
to severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation also is
possible. Keep your tire pressures at the proper levels.
If a tire frequently needs refilling, we recommend that the
system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Overinflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread, and
a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.
Maintenance
G200300AUN
CAUTION
• Warm tires normally exceed
recommended cold tire pressures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6
psi). Do not release air from
warm tires to adjust the pressure or the tires will be underinflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire
inflation valve caps. Without
the valve cap, dirt or moisture
could get into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If a
valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
WARNING - Tire Inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
CAUTION - Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the
tires are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than 1.6 km (one
mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your
spare tire each time you check
the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly
worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
G200301AEN
How to check
Use a good quality gage to check tire
pressure. You can not tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they're
underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
7 45
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
7 46
G200400AUN
WARNING
• Inspect your tires frequently
for proper inflation as well as
wear and damage. Always use
a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire
failure leading to accidents,
injuries, and even death. The
recommended cold tire pressure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on
the tire label located on the driver's side center pillar.
• Worn tires can cause accidents. Replace tires that are
worn, show uneven wear, or
are damaged.
• Remember to check the pressure of your spare tire.
HYUNDAI recommends that
you check the spare every
time you check the pressure
of the other tires on your vehicle.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recommended that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, outof-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
9.
Maintenance
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
With a full-size spare tire
✽ NOTICE
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to
left.
S2BLA790
Without a spare tire
WARNING
S2BLA790A
Directional tires (if equipped)
• Do not use the compact spare
tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause
unusual handling characteristics that could result in death,
severe injury, or property
damage.
G200500AUN
Wheel alignment and tire balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
CBGQ0707A
7 47
Maintenance
CAUTION
Tread wear indicator
When replacing the tires, recheck
and tighten the wheel nuts after
driving about 1,000 km (620miles). If
the steering wheel shakes or the
vehicle vibrates while driving, the
tire is out of balance. Align the tire
balance. If the problem is not
solved, we recommend that you
contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
OEN076053
G200600CEN
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replacing the tire.
7 48
WARNING - Replacing
tires
To reduce the chance or serious
or fatal injuries from an accident caused by tire failure or
loss of vehicle control:
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are
damaged. Worn tires can
cause loss of braking effectiveness, steering control, and
traction.
• Do not drive your vehicle with
too little or too much pressure
in your tires. This can lead to
uneven wear and tire failure.
• When replacing tires, never
mix radial and bias-ply tires
on the same car. You must
replace all tires (including the
spare) if moving from radial to
bias-ply tires.
(Continued)
Maintenance
(Continued)
• Using tires and wheel other
than the recommended sizes
could cause unusual handling
characteristics and poor vehicle control, resulting in a serious accident.
• Wheels that do not meet
HYUNDAI’s
specifications
may fit poorly and result in
damage to the vehicle or
unusual handling and poor
vehicle control.
• The ABS works by comparing
the speed of the wheels. Tire
size can affect wheel speed.
When replacing tires, all 4
tires must use the same size
originally supplied with the
vehicle. Using tires of a different size can cause the ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System) and
ESP (Electronic Stability
Program) (if equipped) to
work irregularly.
G200700BUN
G200800AUN
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling
characteristics, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance,
snow
chain
clearance,
speedometer and odometer calibration, headlight aim and
bumper height.
G200900AUN
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, we recommend that the
wheel alignment be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
7 49
Maintenance
G201002AEN
1
2. Tire size designation
5,6
7
4
2
3
1
I030B04JM
G201000AUN
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
G201001AUN
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
7 50
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replacement tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P245/65R17 105T
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
cars or light trucks; however, not
all tires have this marking).
245 - Tire width in millimeters.
65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
105 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
T - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Maintenance
Wheel size designation
Tire speed ratings
G201003AEN
Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designation mean.
The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being
used for passenger car tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe operating speed.
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Example wheel size designation:
7.0JX17
7.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
Speed
Rating
Symbol
S
T
H
V
Z
Maximum Speed
180 km/h (112 mph)
190 km/h (118 mph)
210 km/h (130 mph)
240 km/h (149 mph)
Above 240 km/h (149 mph)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1614 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2014.
7 51
Maintenance
WARNING - Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tires generally be replaced after
six (6) years of normal service.
Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
warning can result in sudden
tire failure, which could lead to
a loss of control and an accident involving serious injury or
death.
7 52
G201004AEN
G201006AUN
4. Tire ply composition and material
6. Maximum load rating
The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
G201005AUN
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
G2010007BEN
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example:
TREAD wear 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATUE A
Maintenance
Tread wear
Traction - AA, A, B & C
Temperature -A, B & C
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-ahalf times (1½) as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straightahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING - Tire
temperature
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tire failure. This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death.
7 53
Maintenance
Low aspect ratio tire (if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires
are optimized for handling and braking, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise compare with normal tires.
7 54
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easier to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving,
inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not damaged.
- If the tire is impacted, we recommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
- To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 3,000km.
CAUTION
• It is not easy to recognize the
tire damage with your own
eyes. But if there is the slightest hint of tire damage, even
though you cannot see the tire
damage with your own eyes,
have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire
damage may cause air leakage from the tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driving on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.
• You can find out the tire information on the tire sidewall.
Maintenance
FUSES
Blade type
Normal
Blown
Cartridge type
Normal
Blown
Fusible link
Normal
Blown
1VQA4037
G210000CEN
This vehicle has 3 fuse panels, one located in the driver’s side panel bolster, the
other in the engine compartment.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check the
appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has
blown, the element inside the fuse will be
melted.
If the electrical system does not work,
first check the driver’s side fuse panel.
Before replacing a blown fuse, turn off
the ignition. and then disconnect the negative battery cable. replace it in a safe
place.
Always replace a blown fuse with one of
the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this indicates an electrical problem. Avoid using
the system involved and we recommend
that you consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type
for lower amperage rating, cartridge type,
and fusible link for higher amperage ratings.
WARNING - Fuse replacement
• Never replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or aluminum
foil instead of the proper fuse even as a temporary repair. It may
cause extensive wiring damage
and a possible fire.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove fuses
because it may cause a short circuit
and damage the system.
✽ NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label may
differ from equipped items.
A vehicle’s electrical system is protected
from electrical overload damage by
fuses.
7 55
Maintenance
CAUTION
• When replacing a blown fuse or
relay with a new one, make sure
the new fuse or relay fits tightly
into the clips. The incomplete fastening fuse or relay may cause
the vehicle wiring and electric
systems damage and a possible
fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays and
terminals fastened with bolts or
nuts. The fuses, relays and terminals may be fastened incompletely, and it may cause a possible
fire. If fuses, relays and terminals
fastened with bolts or nuts are
blown, we recommend that you
consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a
driver or wiring. It may cause contact failure and system malfunction.
7 56
OTQ077040
G210100AFD
Instrument panel fuse replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
OTQ077041
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.
Use the removal tool provided in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown.
Spare fuses are provided in the inner
fuse panel (or in the engine compartment fuse panel).
5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, we recommend that you
consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of
the same rating from a circuit you may
not need for operating the vehicle, such
as the cigarette lighter fuse.
Maintenance
✽ NOTICE
If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the fuses are
OK, check the fuse panel in the engine
compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must
be replaced.
• If the memory fuse is pulled up from
the fuse panel, the warning chime,
audio, clock and interior lamps, etc.,
will not operate. Some items must be
reset after replacement. Refer to
“Battery” in this section.
• Even though the memory fuse is
pulled up, the battery can still be discharged by operation of the headlights or other electrical devices.
OTQ077042
G210101AUN
Memory fuse
Your vehicle is equipped with a memory
fuse to prevent battery discharge if your
vehicle is parked without being operated
for prolonged periods. Use the following
procedures before parking the vehicle for
prolonged periods.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.
3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and
pull up the memory fuse.
7 57
Maintenance
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,
use the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, we recommend that
you consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
OTQ077043
Diesel only
OTQ077044
G210200AEN
Engine compartment fuse
replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling up.
7 58
CAUTION
After checking the fuse panel in the
engine compartment, securely
install the fuse panel cover. If not,
electrical failures may occur from
water contact.
OTQ077045
G210201AEN
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽ NOTICE
If the main fuse is blown, we recommend that you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Maintenance
G210300ATQ
Fuse/relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.
Instrument panel fuse panel
Engine compartment fuse panel
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing.
When you inspect the fuse panel in your
vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.
Diesel only
OTQ077046/OTQ077047/OTQ077048
7 59
Maintenance
Instrument panel fuse panel
Description
Fuse rating
AUDIO-2
C/LIGHTER
S/HTD DRI
DRL
RR FOG LP
H/LP
FRT WIPER
BCM
HTR
10A
20A
10A
10A
15A
10A
25A
10A
10A
B/UP LP
ABS
T/SIG LP
A/BAG
A/BAG IND
MODULE
ECU
START
MIRR HTD
STOP LP
BWS
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
15A
10A
7 60
Protected component
Audio, Digital clock, BCM, Power outside mirror switch
Cigarette lighter, Front power outlet
Driver seat warmer switch (if equipped)
BCM (if equipped)
Rear fog lamp relay
Head lamp High/Low relay
Front wiper relay, Front wiper motor
BCM
Front/Rear blower relay, Front/Rear A/C control module, Condenser fan relay, Electro chromic mirror, Thermo
switch, PTC heater relay(D4CB), EGR solenoid valve(D4BH)
Back-up lamp relay, Back-up lamp switch, Transmission range switch
ABS/ESP control module, ESP switch(D4CB)
Hazard switch
SRS control module
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster, BCM, Immobilizer control module(D4BH), A/C relay(D4BH), Generator resister
Vehicle speed sensor, ECM, Air flow sensor(D4CB), Injection pump(D4BH), TCM, Fuel filter warning sensor
Start relay, Burglar alarm relay
Front A/C control module, Power outside mirror & defogger LH/RH
Stop lamp switch
Buzzer
Maintenance
Description
DR LOCK
FRT FOG LP
B/ALARM
AUDIO-1
(POWER
CONNECTOR)
ROOM LP
(POWER
CONNECTOR)
HAZARD
FUEL LID
P/WDW LH
P/WDW RH
Fuse rating
Protected component
20A
10A
10A
15A
Door lock/unlock relay
Front fog lamp relay
Burglar alarm horn relay
Audio
10A
Digital clock, Instrument cluster, Courtesy lamp LH/RH,
Step lamp LH/RH, Cargo lamp, Room lamp switch,
Door warning switch, Data link connector, BCM, Vanity lamp switch LH/RH, Overhead console lamp
Hazard relay, Hazard switch
Fuel filler door relay
Power window main switch, Power window switch LH
Power window main switch, Power window switch RH
15A
15A
25A
25A
7 61
Maintenance
Engine compartment main fuse panel
Description
ALT
BATT 1
BATT 2
BATT 3/RAD FAN
IGN 1
IGN 2
ECU MAIN
FRT HTR
RR HTD
RR HTR
ABS 1
ABS 2
C/FAN
F/FILTER
ECU/TCU
HORN
BURNER
F/PUMP
ALT
H/LP HI
A/CON
FRT DEICER
TAIL LH
7 62
Fuse rating
Protected component
150A
Fuse(A/CON, FRT DEICER), Fusible link(FRT HTR, RR HTR, RR HTD, C/FAN, F/FILTER, ABS 1/2),
Generator, E/R fuse & relay box RH
Fuse(DR LOCK, FRT FOG LP, B/ALARM, Power connector(AUDIO-1, ROOM LP))
Fuse(FUEL LID, P/WDW LH/RH, HAZARD), Multipurpose check connector
Fuse(STOP LP, BWS), Radiator fan relay(G4KC)
Ignition switch(ACC, IG1)
Ignition switch(IG2, START), Start relay
Engine control relay
Front blower relay
Rear defogger relay
Rear blower relay
ABS control module(G4KC)
ABS control module(G4KC)
Condenser fan relay 1
Fuel filter heater relay(DIESEL)
TCM, ECM (Gasoline)
Horn relay
Fuel fired heater control module(D4CB)
Fuel pump relay(G4KC)
Generator(D4BH)
Head lamp(HIGH) relay, Head lamp(LOW) relay
A/C relay
Windshield defogger relay (if equipped)
Head lamp LH(Position lamp), Rear combi lamp LH, License lamp LH
50A
30A
40A
40A
40A
30A/20A
40A
40A
40A
40A
40A
30A
30A
10A
10A
20A
15A
10A
15A
10A
15A
10A
Maintenance
Description
Fuse rating
TAIL RH
H/LP LO LH
H/LP LO RH
SNSR 1
10A
10A
10A
10A
SNSR 2
15A
IGN COIL
ECU 1
ECU 2
SAFETY P/WDW
15A
10A
20A
20A
Protected component
Head lamp RH(Position lamp), Rear combi lamp RH, License lamp RH
Head lamp LH
Head lamp RH
A/C relay, Condenser fan relay(D4CB), Lambda sensor(D4CB), PTC heater relay #1(D4CB), Stop lamp
switch(D4CB)
D4CB:Camshaft position sensor, Glow plug relay, EGR actuator, VGT control valve, Immobilizer control module
G4KC:Fuel pump relay, Canister purge solenoid valve, Oil control valve, Crankshaft position sensor, Oxygen
sensor, Immobilizer control module, Idle speed control actuator
Ignition coil #1~#4(G4KC), Condenser(G4KC)
ECM(D4CB)
ECM(D4CB, G4KC), Injector #1~#4(G4KC)
Safety power window
Engine compartment sub fuse panel (Diesel engine)
Description
GLOW
PTC 1
PTC 2
PTC 3
ABS 1
ABS 2
GLOW
Fuse rating
80A
40A
40A
40A
40A
40A
10A
Protected component
Glow plug relay
PTC heater relay #1
PTC heater relay #2
PTC heater relay #3
ABS/ESP control module
ABS/ESP control module
ECM (D4BH)
7 63
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
G220000AEN
CAUTION
WARNING - Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light, firmly
apply the parking brake, ensure
that the ignition switch is turned to
the LOCK position and turn off the
lights to avoid sudden movement
of the vehicle and burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
CAUTION
Be sure to replace the burned-out
bulb with one of the same wattage
rating. Otherwise, it may cause
damage to the fuse or electric
wiring system.
7 64
If you don't have necessary tools,
the correct bulbs and the expertise,
we recommend that you consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. In
many cases, it is difficult to replace
vehicle light bulbs because other
parts of the vehicle must be
removed before you can get to the
bulb. This is especially true if you
have to remove the headlight
assembly to get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlight
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
After heavy, driving rain or washing,
headlight and taillight lenses could
appear frosty. This condition is caused by
the temperature difference between the
lamp inside and outside. This is similar
to the condensation on your windows
inside your vehicle during the rain and
doesn’t indicate a problem with your
vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp
bulb circuitry, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
OTQ077049
G220100AUN
Headlight, position light, turn signal light, front fog light bulb
replacement
(1) Headlight (High)
(2) Headlight (Low)
(3) Position light
(4) Front turn signal light
(5) Front fog light (if equipped)
Maintenance
(Continued)
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
OTQ077063
G220101BTQ
Headlight bulb
WARNING - Halogen bulbs
• Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will produce flying
pieces of glass if broken.
• Always handle them carefully,
and avoid scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid
contact with liquids. Never touch
the glass with bare hands.
Residual oil may cause the bulb
to overheat and burst when lit. A
bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlight.
(Continued)
OTQ077062
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlight bulb cover by
turning it counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly.
4. Install a new headlight bulb assembly.
5. Install the headlight bulb cover by turning it clockwise.
✽ NOTICE
We recommend that the headlight aiming be adjusted after an accident or
after the headlight assembly is reinstalled at a authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
7 65
Maintenance
G220102ATQ
Turn signal light/position light, fog
light bulb (if equipped)
Turn signal light
1. If necessary, remove the headlight
assembly by loosening the headlight
installation bolts. When you remove
the headlight assembly, you may need
to remove the bumper according to the
vehicle.
2. Replace the malfunctioned light bulb.
3. Install the headlight assembly.
Fog light bulb (if equipped)
1. Remove the fog light under cover by
loosening the screw.
2. Replace the malfunctioned light bulb.
3. Install the fog light under cover.
7 66
6. Connect the power connector to the
socket.
7. Reinstall the front bumper under cover
(if equipped).
OTQ073100
Front fog light bulbs replacement
(for europe, if equipped)
1. Remove the front bumper under cover
(if equipped).
2. Reach your hand into the back of the
front bumper.
3. Disconnect the power connector from
the socket.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket counter
clockwise until the tabs on the socket
align with the slots on the housing.
5. Install the new bulb-socket into the
housing by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots in the housing.
Push the socket into the housing and
turn the socket clockwise.
Maintenance
■ Type A
OTQ077050
Position light
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the socket by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
4. Insert a new bulb in the socket.
5. Install the position light socket.
OTQ077056
■ Type B
OTQ077051/OTQ077051G
G220200AUN
G220300ATQ
Side repeater light bulb replacement (if equipped)
Rear combination light bulb
replacement
1. Remove the light assembly from the
vehicle by prying the lens and pulling
the assembly out.
2. Disconnect the bulb electrical connector.
3. Separate the socket and the lens parts
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the lens part.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
5. Insert a new bulb in the socket.
6. Reassemble the socket and the lens
part.
7. Connect the bulb electrical connector.
8. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
- Without rear fog light
(1) Tail light
(2) Back-up light
(3) Rear turn signal light
(4) Stop light
- With rear fog light
(1) Tail and stop light
(2) Back-up light
(3) Rear turn signal light
(4) Rear fog light
7 67
Maintenance
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
7. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
8. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
OTQ077052
OTQ077054
OTQ077053
OTQ077055
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Loosen the light assembly retaining
screws with a philips head screwdriver.
3. Remove the rear combination light
assembly from the body of the vehicle.
4. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
7 68
Maintenance
Type A
OTQ077060G
OEN076039
OTQ077092
OTQ077091
G220400ATQ
High mounted stop light
replacement (if equipped)
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Loosen the light assembly retaining
bolts with a proper tool.
3. Remove the light assembly from the
body of the vehicle.
4. Separate the socket and the lens parts
by removing the screws with a philips
head screwdriver.
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
6. Insert a new bulb in the socket.
7. Reassemble the socket and the lens
part.
8. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
Type B
OTQ077081
G220500AUN
License plate light bulb replacement
1. Loosen the lens retaining screws with
a philips head screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
7 69
Maintenance
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens securely with the
lens retaining screws.
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently
pry the lens from the interior light
housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Type A
WARNING
OTQ077065
Type B
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the “OFF” button is depressed to avoid burning
your fingers or receiving an electric
shock.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
OTQ077065G
Type C
CAUTION
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
OTQ077065L
G220600AUN
Interior light bulb replacement
7 70
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
G230101AUN
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning and
caution statements that appear on the
label.
G230102CEN
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish from
rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly
and frequently at least once a month with
lukewarm or cold water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each offroad trip. Pay special attention to the
removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,
mud, and other foreign materials. Make
sure the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors and rocker panels are kept
clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar deposits
can damage your vehicle’s finish if not
removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on
painted surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do
not allow soap to dry on the finish.
CAUTION
• Do not use strong soap, chemical
detergents or hot water, and do
not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or when the body of the
vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the side
windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water. Water may leak through the
windows and wet the interior.
• To prevent damage to the plastic
parts and lamps, do not clean
with chemical solvents or strong
detergents.
WARNING - Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.
OJB037800
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine compartment including high pressure
water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits located in
the engine compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside
the vehicle as this may damage
them.
7 71
Maintenance
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing. Use a good quality liquid or
paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect
it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials
with a spot remover will usually strip the
wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax
these areas even if the rest of the vehicle
does not yet need waxing.
G230103AUN
G230105AUN
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust
and may develop into a major repair
expense.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may collect on the underbody. If these materials
are not removed, accelerated rusting can
occur on underbody parts such as the
fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system, even though they have been
treated with rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody
and wheel openings with lukewarm or
cold water once a month, after off-road
driving and at the end of each winter. Pay
special attention to these areas because
it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It
will do more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it. The
lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and
frame members have drain holes that
should not be allowed to clog with dirt;
trapped water in these areas can cause
rusting.
✽ NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and requires
any metal repair or replacement, be sure
the body shop applies anti-corrosion
materials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
CAUTION
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body
with a dry cloth will scratch the
finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or
caustic agents on chrome-plated
or anodized aluminum parts. This
may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.
7 72
G230104AUN
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects, use a
tar remover, not a scraper or other
sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal
parts from corrosion, apply a coating of
wax or chrome preservative and rub to
a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts with
a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with
non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other
protective compound.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.
Maintenance
G230106AUN
G230107AUN
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated with a
clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, polishing compound, solvent, or wire
brushes on aluminum wheels. They
may scratch or damage the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water.
Also, be sure to clean the wheels after
driving on salted roads. This helps prevent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with highspeed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid detergent. It may damage and corrode the
aluminum wheels coated with a clear
protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design and
construction practices to combat corrosion, we produces cars of the highest
quality. However, this is only part of the
job. To achieve the long-term corrosion
resistance your vehicle can deliver, the
owner's cooperation and assistance is
also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
on your car are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath the
car.
• Removal of paint or protective coatings
by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor
scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in which
corrosion is most likely to occur. For
example, corrosion is accelerated by
high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such
conditions, the corrosive material is kept
in contact with the car surfaces by moisture that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive because it is
slow to dry and holds moisture in contact
with the vehicle. Although the mud
appears to be dry, it can still retain the
moisture and promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate
corrosion of parts that are not properly
ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to keep your car clean
and free of mud or accumulations of
other materials. This applies not only to
the visible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the car.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your car is
regularly exposed to corrosive materials,
corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common causes of
accelerated corrosion are road salts,
dust control chemicals, ocean air and
industrial pollution.
7 73
Maintenance
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from getting started by observing the following:
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to
keep your car clean and free of corrosive
materials. Attention to the underside of
the car is particularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area —
where road salts are used, near the
ocean, areas with industrial pollution,
acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra
care to prevent corrosion. In winter,
hose off the underside of your car at
least once a month and be sure to
clean the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the car,
give particular attention to the components under the fenders and other
areas that are hidden from view. Do a
thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than washing it
away will accelerate corrosion rather
than prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
7 74
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members, be
sure that drain holes are kept open so
that moisture can escape and not be
trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is
particularly true if you wash your car in
the garage or drive it into the garage
when it is still wet or covered with snow,
ice or mud. Even a heated garage can
contribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish should be
covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as
possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through,
the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted
surfaces in just a few hours. Always
remove bird droppings as soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor mats
and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check
under the mats periodically to be sure
the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if
you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or
chemicals in the car.
These should be carried only in proper
containers and any spills or leaks should
be cleaned up, flushed with clean water
and thoroughly dried.
Maintenance
Interior care
G230201CUN
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner and
air freshener from contacting the interior
parts because they may cause damage
or discoloration. If they do contact the
interior parts, wipe them off immediately.
See the instructions that follow for the
proper way to clean vinyl.
CAUTION
Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electrical/
electronic components inside the
vehicle as this may damage them.
G230202AUN
G230203AUN
Cleaning the upholstery and interior
trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for cleaning
upholstery or carpet. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not
bleach or re-dye the webbing because
this may weaken it.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or carpets.
Remove fresh spots immediately with a
fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not
receive immediate attention, the fabric
can be stained and its color can be
affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties
can be reduced if the material is not
properly maintained.
CAUTION
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol
content solutions. If you use high
alcohol content solutions or
acid/alkaline detergents, the color
of the leather may fade or the surface may get stripped off.
CAUTION
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fireresistant properties.
G230204AUN
Cleaning the interior window glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with
an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should
be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the
directions on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the inside
of the rear window. This may result
in damage to the rear window
defroster grid.
7 75
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
G270000AEN
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty information contained in the Service Passport
in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all applicable
emission regulations.
There are three emission control systems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function of
the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your car
inspected and maintained by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in accordance with
the maintenance schedule in this manual.
7 76
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Program (ESP) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from misfiring during dynamometer testing,
turn the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP) system off by pressing the ESP switch.
• After dynamometer testing is completed, turn the ESP system back on
by pressing the ESP switch again.
G270100AUN
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution
caused by blow-by gases being emitted
from the crankcase. This system supplies
fresh filtered air to the crankcase through
the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,
which then pass through the PCV valve
into the induction system.
G270200AEN
2. Evaporative emission control
system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmosphere.
G270201AUN
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the
canister are drawn into the surge tank
through the purge control solenoid valve.
G270202AUN
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the Engine Control Module
(ECM); when the engine coolant temperature is low during idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken
into the engine. After the engine warmsup during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the
engine.
Maintenance
G270300AUN
G270302AUN
3. Exhaust emission control
system
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present with
other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside
your vehicle, have it inspected and
repaired immediately. If you ever suspect exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all the
windows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
The Exhaust Emission Control System is
a highly effective system which controls
exhaust emissions while maintaining
good vehicle performance.
G270301BUN
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could affect
its performance, safety or durability and
may even violate governmental safety
and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modification
may not be covered under warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage, battery discharge and fire. For your safety,
do not use unauthorized electronic
devices.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide (CO). Though colorless and odorless, it is dangerous
and could be lethal if inhaled.
Follow the instructions on this
page to avoid CO poisoning.
• Do not operate the engine in confined
or closed areas (such as garages) any
more than what is necessary to move
the vehicle in or out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short time
with the engine running, adjust the
ventilation system (as needed) to draw
outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for any extended time with the
engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to start,
excessive attempts to restart the
engine may cause damage to the
emission control system.
7 77
Maintenance
G270303CEN
Operating precautions for catalytic
converters (if equipped)
WARNING - Fire
• A hot exhaust system can ignite
flammable items under your vehicle. Do not park, idle, or drive the
vehicle over or near flammable
objects, such as grass, vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.
• The exhaust system and catalytic
system are very hot while the
engine is running or immediately
after the engine is turned off. Keep
away from the exhaust system
and catalytic, you may get burned.
Also, do not remove the heat sink
around the exhaust system, do
not seal the bottom of the vehicle
or do not coat the vehicle for corrosion control. It may present a
fire risk under certain conditions.
7 78
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic
converter emission control device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when there
are signs of engine malfunction, such
as misfire or a noticeable loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.
Examples of misuse are coasting with
the ignition off and descending steep
grades in gear with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high idle
speed for extended periods (5 minutes
or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any part
of the engine or emission control system. We recommend that the system
be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.
If you run out of gasoline, it could
cause the engine to misfire and result
in excessive loading of the catalytic
converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void your
warranties.
Diesel Particulate Filter (if equipped)
The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) system removes the soot emitted from the
vehicle.
Unlike a disposable air filter, the DPF
system automatically burns (oxidizes)
and removes the accumulated soot
according to the driving condition. In
other words, the active burning by engine
control system and high exhaust gas
temperature caused by normal/high driving condition burns and removes the
accumulated soot.
However, if the vehicle continues to be
driven at low speed for long time, the
accumulated soot may not be automatically removed because of low exhaust
gas temperature. In this particular case,
the amount of soot is out of detection
limit, the soot oxidation process by
engine control system may not happen
and the malfunction indicator light may
blink.
When the malfunction indicator light
blinks, it may stop blinking by driving the
vehicle at more than 60km/h (37 mph) or
at more than second gear with 1500 ~
2000 engine rpm for a certain time (for
about 25 minutes).
Maintenance
If the malfunction indicator light continues to be blinked in spite of the procedure, we recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
If you continue to drive with the malfunction indicator light blinking for a long
time, the DPF system can be damaged
and fuel consumption can be worsen.
CAUTION - Diesel Fuel
(if equipped with DPF)
It is recommended to use the regulated automotive diesel fuel for
diesel vehicle equipped with the
DPF system.
If you use diesel fuel including high
sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur)
and unspecified additives, it can
cause the DPF system to be damaged and white smoke can be emitted.
7 79
Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-2
Vehicle certification label / 8-2
Tire specification and pressure label / 8-3
Engine number / 8-3
Air conditioner compressor label / 8-3
Declaration of conformity / 8-4
Consumer information
8
Consumer information
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
Frame number
VIN label (if equipped)
OTQ087001
H010000BTQ
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
the number used in registering your car
and in all legal matters pertaining to its
ownership, etc.
8 2
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
OEN086004N
The VIN is also on a plate attached to the
top of the dashboard. The number on the
plate can easily be seen through the
windshield from outside.
OTQ087002
H020000AUN
The vehicle certification label attachted
on the driver’s (or front passenger’s) side
center pillar gives the vehicle identification number (VIN).
Consumer information
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
ENGINE NUMBER
AIR CONDITIONER
COMPRESSOR LABEL
4D56 Diesel engine
B060B01P
A2.5/A2 2.5 Diesel engine
OTQ087003
OHC081001
H030000AUN
The tires supplied on your new vehicle
are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's side
center pillar gives the tire pressures recommended for your car.
A compressor label informs you the type
of compressor your vehicle is equipped
with such as model, supplier part number, production number, refrigerant (1)
and refrigerant oil (2).
OTQ087004
Gasoline engine
B060D01P
H04000AUN
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
8 3
Consumer information
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
■ Example
CE0678
The radio frequency components of the
vehicle comply with requirements and
other relevant provisions of Directive
1995/5/EC.
Further information including the manufacturer's declaration of conformity is
available on HYUNDAI web site as follows;
http://service.hyundai-motor.com
8 4
Dimensions / 9-2
Bulb wattage / 9-2
Tires and wheels / 9-3
Load and speed capacity of tires / 9-3
Recommended lubricants and capacities / 9-4
Specifications
9
Specifications
DIMENSIONS
BULB WATTAGE
I010000ATQ
I030000ATQ
Item
mm (in)
Overall length
5125 (201.8)
Overall width
1920 (75.6)
Overall height
1925 (75.8)
Front tread
1685 (66.3)
Rear tread
1660 (65.4)
Wheelbase
3200 (126.0)
Above dimensions are based on 12-seater/8-seater vehicle.
Light Bulb
Headlights (Low)
Headlights (High)
Front turn signal lights
Position lights
Side repeater lights*
Front fog lights*
Rear fog light*
Stop and tail lights
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
High mounted stop light*
License plate lights
Room lamps
Luggage lamp*
Step lamp*
* : If equipped
9 2
Wattage
55
55
21
5
5
27 or 35
21
21/5
21
16
5
5
10
10
5
Specifications
TIRES AND WHEELS
I020000BTQ
Except China
Inflation pressure bar (psi, kPa)
Tire
Item
size
Full size tire 215/70R16C
Wheel size
6.5Jx16
Wagon
Normal load *
Wheel lug nut torque
Van
Maximum load
kg•m (lb•ft, N•m)
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
2.9
3.25
2.9
3.5
2.9
3.5
9~11
(42, 290) (47,325) (42, 290) (51,350) (42, 290) (51,350)
(65~79, 88~107)
* Normal load : Up to 3 persons
LOAD AND SPEED CAPACITY OF TIRES
Item
Tire size
Wheel size
Full size tire
215/70R16C
6.5JX16
Load Capacity
Speed Capacity
LI *1
kg
SS *2
km/h
108
1000
T
190
*1 LI : LOAD INDEX
*2 SS : SPEED SYMBOL
9 3
Specifications
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
I040000HTQ
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct
lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Volume (l / US qt.)
Lubricant
Engine oil *1 *2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
Engine oil
consumption
Manual
transmission fluid
Diesel
A2.5 /
A2 2.5
4D56
Gasoline
Normal driving condition
Severe driving condition
A2.5 Diesel
A2 2.5 Diesel
4D56 Diesel / Gasoline
7.4 (7.82)
5.4 (5.71)
5.1 (5.39)
MAX. 1 l /1500 km
MAX. 1 l /1000 km
3.0 (3.17)
2.2 (2.33)
1.95 (2.06)
Classification
VGT*3
- without DPF*5 : API Service CH-4 or above, ACEA B4
- with DPF*5 : ACEA C3
WGT*4
- without DPF*5 : API Service CF-4 or above, ACEA B4
- with DPF*5 : ACEA C3
API Service CF-4 or above, ACEA B2 or B3
API Service SM*6, ILSAC GF-4 or above
API Service GL-4
SAE 75W/85
*1: Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on page 9-6.
*2: Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing
the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s
time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*3: VGT : Variable Geometry Turbocharger
*4: WGT : Waste Gate Turbocharger
*5: DPF : Diesel Particulate Filter
*6: If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
9 4
Specifications
Automatic
transmission fluid
Lubricant
A2.5 / A2 2.5 Diesel
4D56 Diesel / Gasoline
Power steering
Wagon
Coolant
Van
Brake fluid
Rear axle oil
Fuel
Diesel
Gasoline
Diesel
Gasoline
Volume (l / US qt.)
10.0 (10.60)
8.0 (8.45)
0.9~1.0 (0.95~1.06)
13 (13.74)
10.2 (10.8)
10 (10.75)
7.1 (7.5)
0.7~0.8 (0.7~0.8)
2.1 (2.23)
75 (19.81 US gal.)
Classification
APOLLOIL ATF RED-1
CASTLE AUTO FLUID T-IV, DIAMOND ATF SP-I or
other brands approved by Hyundai Motor Co.
PSF-3
Mixture of antifreeze and water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminium radiator)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
The temperate zone (-30°C~30°C) : API GL-4 (SAE 90)
The torrid zone (30°C~) : API GL-4 (SAE 140)
The frigid zone (~-30°C) : API GL-5 (SAE 80)
-
Available Engine oil (For Europe A2 2.5 Diesel engine)
Supplier
Shell
SK
Chevron
Total
Product
HELIX ULTRA AP 5W-30
ZIC LS 5W-30
KIXX D1 5W-30
QUARTZ INEO MC3 5W-30
9 5
Specifications
I040100DUN
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant. This is especially
important in dusty or sandy areas
and when the vehicle is used on
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine
and other mechanisms that could
be damaged.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an
effect on fuel economy and cold weather
operating (engine start and engine oil
flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils
can provide better fuel economy and cold
weather performance, however, higher
viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using
oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result in engine damage.
Temperature
When choosing an oil, consider the range
of temperature your vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change.
Proceed to select the recommended oil
viscosity from the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
°C -30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
(°F)
-10
0
20
40
60
80
100
50
120
20W-50
15W-40
Gasoline
Engine Oil *1
10W-30
5W-20*2, 5W-30
15W-40
10W-30/10W-40
Diesel
Engine Oil
5W-30/5W-40
0W-30*
3
*1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE
5W-20*2 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country,
select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
*2. In Middle East, do not use the engine oil of viscosity grade SAE 5W-20.
*3. It is only for extreme cold area and to be restricted by driving condition and area.
(Especially, not recommended for sustained high loaded and high speed operation.)
9 6
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement